AT-60SL - Numeric keypad ROLAND - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL AT-60SL ROLAND

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: "IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS" (Owner's manual p. 2), "USING THE UNIT SAFELY" (Owner's manual p. 3), and "IMPORTANT NOTES" (Owner's manual p. 5). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owner's manual should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION: BISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVBIR

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:

1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth.
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. When the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12. Never use with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table except as specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

For the U.K.

IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.

BLUE: NEUTRAL

BROWN: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS

About WARNING and CAUTION Notices

▲WARNING	Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly.
▲CAUTION	Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly. * Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings, as well to domestic animals or pets.

About the Symbols

▲	The △ symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings. The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
◎	The ⊙ symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the unit must never be disassembled.
◎	The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out. The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING

WARNING

• Before using this unit, make sure to read the instructions below, and the Owner's Manual.

For AT-60SL

• Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit.

For AT-80SL

• Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit. (The only exception would be where this manual provides specific instructions which should be followed in order to put in place user-installable options; see p. 251.)

• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within it (except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the "Information" page.

• Never use or store the unit in places that are:

• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or are

• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are

• Subject to high levels of vibration.

• Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.

• The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions, or as marked on the rear side of unit.

• Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also, the supplied power cord must not be used with any other device.

• Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord, producing severed elements and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards!

• This unit, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should immediately stop using the unit, and consult an audiologist.

• Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.

WARNING

• Immediately turn the power off, remove the power cord from the outlet, and request servicing by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the "Information" page when:

• The power-supply cord, or the plug has been damaged; or

• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto the unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has become wet); or

• The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance.

• In households with small children, an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit.

• Protect the unit from strong impact. (Do not drop it!)

• Do not force the unit's power-supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be especially careful when using extension cords—the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord's outlet must never exceed the power rating (watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through.

• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the "Information" page.

For AT-80SL

• Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the light bulbs (p. 20).

• Do not put anything that contains water (e.g., flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft cloth.

CAUTION

• The unit should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation.

• Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.

CAUTION

• At regular intervals, you should unplug the power plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time. Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire.
• Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children.
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the unit.
• Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.

• If you need to move the instrument, take note of the precautions listed below. At least two persons are required to safely lift and move the unit. It should be handled carefully, all the while keeping it level. Make sure to have a firm grip, to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage.

• Check to make sure the knob bolt securing the unit to the stand have not become loose. Fasten them again securely whenever you notice any loosening.

• Disconnect the power cord.
• Disconnect all cords coming from external devices.
• Close the lid.
• Fold down the music stand.

• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 20).

• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet.

• Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you do not get your fingers pinched (p. 20). Adult supervision is recommended whenever small children use the unit.

• Should you remove the knob bolts, make sure to put them in a safe place out of children's reach, so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally.

For AT-80SL

• Should you remove screws and light bulbs, make sure to put them in a safe place out of children's reach, so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally.

Important Notes

In addition to the items listed under "IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS" and "USING THE UNIT SAFELY" on pages 2 and 3, please read and observe the following:

Power Supply

• Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter (such as a refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet.
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
• Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cord's plug should be one that is within easy reach.

Placement

• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away from the source of interference.
• This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch them off.

• Observe the following when using the unit's floppy disk drive. For further details, refer to "Before Using Floppy Disks" (p. 6).

• Do not place the unit near devices that produce a strong magnetic field (e.g., loudspeakers).

• Install the unit on a solid, level surface.

• Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while the drive is operating.

• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes. Also, do not allow lighting devices that normally are used while their light source is very close to the unit (such as a piano light), or powerful spotlights to shine upon the same area of the unit for extended periods of time. Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.

• When moved from one location to another where the temperature and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation has completely evaporated.

• Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain on the unit for long periods of time. Such objects can discolor or otherwise harmfully affect the finish.
• Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard or pedal board. This can be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce sound.
• Do not paste stickers, decals, or the like to this instrument. Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the exterior finish.

Maintenance

• To clean the unit, use a dry, soft cloth; or one that is slightly dampened. Try to wipe the entire surface using an equal amount of strength, moving the cloth along with the grain of the wood. Rubbing too hard in the same area can damage the finish.
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.

Repairs and Data

• Please be aware that all data contained in the unit's memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should always be backed up on a floppy disk, or written down on paper (when possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.

Additional Precautions

• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit's memory on a floppy disk.
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on a floppy disk once it has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit's buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.

• A small amount of noise may be heard from the display during normal operation.

• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable's internal elements.

• A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation.
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit's volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially when it is late at night).
• When you need to transport the unit, pack it in shock-absorbent material. Transporting the unit without doing so can cause it to become scratched or damaged, and could lead to malfunction.
• Do not apply undue force to the music stand while it is in use.

• Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using some other make of connection cable, please note the following precautions.

• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications, contact the manufacturer of the cable.

Before Using Floppy Disks Handling the Floppy Disk Drive

• Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free from vibration.
• Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location. Rapid changes in the environment can cause condensation to form inside the drive, which will adversely affect the operation of the drive and/or damage floppy disks. When the unit has been moved, allow it to become accustomed to the new environment (allow a few hours) before operating it.
• To insert a disk, push it gently but firmly into the drive—it will click into place. To remove a disk, press the EJECT button firmly. Do not use excessive force to remove a disk which is lodged in the drive.
• Never eject a disk while reading or writing is in progress, since that can damage the magnetic surface of the disk, rendering it unusable. (The disk drive's indicator will light up at full brightness when the drive is busy reading or writing data. Ordinarily, the indicator will be less brightly lit, or be extinguished.)
• Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or down.
• To prevent damage to the disk drive's heads, always try to hold the floppy disk in a level position (not tilted in any direction) while inserting it into the drive. Push it in firmly, but gently. Never use excessive force.
• To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert only floppy disks into the disk drive. Never insert any other type of disk. Avoid getting paper clips, coins, or any other foreign objects inside the drive.

Handling Floppy Disks

• Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity, please observe the following when handling floppy disks:

• Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.

• Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas.
• Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended temperature range: 10 to 50^ (50 to 122^ ).

• Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as those generated by loudspeakers.

• Floppy disks have a "write protect" tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk.

• The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk. Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk.
• Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By using a dirty or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction.

• Disks containing performance data for this unit should always be locked (have their write protect tab slid to the "Protect" position) before you insert them into the drive on some other unit (except the PR-300, or a product in the HP-G, MT, KR, or Atelier families), or into a computer's drive. Otherwise (if the write protect tab remains in the "Write" position), when you perform any disk operations using the other device's disk drive (such as checking the contents of the disk, or loading data), you risk rendering the disk unreadable by this unit's disk drive.

• GS (G) is a registered trademark of Roland Corporation.

• Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM and IBM PC are registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
• All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
• XG lite (XGite) is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Main Features

We want to take a moment to thank you for your purchase of the Roland AT-80S Luxury/AT-60S Luxury "Atelier Series" Organ. The AT-80S Luxury/AT-60S Luxury is an electronic organ which provides a generous collection of rich organ sounds. In addition, it is designed to be easy to learn and use. In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come, please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety.

• The AT-80S Luxury and AT-60S Luxury are abbreviated in this text as "AT-80SL" and "AT-60SL," respectively.

Basic concepts of the ATELIER series

A full complement of organ sounds

A wide range of basic organ sounds, ranging from jazz organ and pipe organ to theatre organ, are onboard so you are sure to enjoy having access to all the sounds you expect from an organ.

Panel layout based on a tradition of emphasis on realtime operation

Based on the idea that you should be able to sit down and begin playing immediately, the operation buttons of the panel are arranged by function as dictated by classic organ traditions, ensuring easy and intuitive operation. All models of the ATELIER series feature the same operability, allowing you to start playing immediately even if you switch models.

High-quality sounds that you can use without editing

In addition to a full range of organ sounds, high-quality sounds such as strings and brass are also included onboard. You can simply select sounds and enjoy playing the organ—no need to perform complicated editing operations.

Expansive lower keyboard with damper pedal for piano-like expressiveness

Piano is indispensable to the performance of contemporary music. On the ATELIER series, the lower keyboard features an expanded range that gives you the expressive power of a piano. The keyboard also features half-damper pedal capability and initial touch sensitivity, both indispensable for piano performance.

All models provide high-quality grand piano sounds.

Design utilizes your existing music data

The ATELIER series is designed so that even on new models, you will feel right at home and can begin playing immediately. Data compatibility has also been carefully taken into account, and song data or registration data from earlier models can be used without change.

Music styles from around the world

Many of the best-loved musical styles from around the world (rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns) are built in, allowing you to enjoy an international range of performances.

Utilizes SMF music files

Compatible with GM2, the world standard in SMF music files, and equipped with its own floppy disk drive, the ATELIER brings you access to the wealth of SMF music files available on the market. You can also mute parts, allowing you to practice the part for each hand separately, and enjoy performing ensemble with the music files.

Features

RSS reverb technology is used to create a high-quality ambience that surrounds the listener (AT-80SL)

The AT-80SL provides an AUX OUT for RSS Ambience, allowing you to enjoy very high quality RSS reverb sound. In addition, a speaker is built into the panel, ensuring that the performer will also enjoy the exceptional sound quality.

Highly Realistic Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment Functions

All rhythms use data from performances by professional drummers, featuring high-quality patterns with all the grooves and subtle nuance of the real thing. In addition, you can use automatic accompaniments that are perfectly matched to each rhythm to enjoy the feeling of playing with your own band in the background.

Active Expression sounds

For some of the sounds, moving the expression pedal will vary not only the volume but also the tone, or add other sounds. From pianissimo to fortissimo, the tonal character of the sound itself will change as you perform a crescendo, or strings may appear behind the piano, creating dynamic changes in tonality.

"Music Assistant" and "Quick Registration" functions

The "Music Assistant" function makes it easy to recall appropriate rhythm and sound settings simply by selecting a desired atmosphere for your song. The "Quick Registration" function lets you use keywords to select wonderful registrations created by top-ranking organizers such as Hector Olivera.

Human voices and phrases

In addition to a full array of organ sounds, the ATELIER-S series provides human voices such as "Jazz Scat," and human voice phrases such as "Amen."

Harmony Intelligence

The Harmony Intelligence function automatically adds harmony to the upper keyboard sound according to the chord you play in the lower keyboard. This gives you greater tonal depth and a more powerful performance.

Rhythm Customize Function Lets You Arrange the Internal Rhythms

You can use the "Rhythm Customize" function to edit the internal rhythms, for example by adding a single cymbal at the end or changing the drum tone in a pattern. You can also save edited rhythms to the instrument as well as to floppy disks.

76-note lower keyboard for plenty of range

The 76-note range can be split into zones, allowing a solo voice, pedal bass voice, percussion, etc., to be played independently for an even wider range of performance possibilities. Since the lower keyboard can be divided into a maximum of four parts, you have at your command expressive power that rivals that of a three-manual organ.

In addition, you can use the Drums/SFX function to play drum sounds or sound effects from the entire lower keyboard.

Newly developed jazz organ style footage sound generator (AT-80SL)

The AT-80SL features a new "digital harmonic bar" function that lets you adjust the volume of each footage. In addition to the rich sounds of the ATELIER series, you can enjoy the versatile tonal expressions of a jazz organ.

Music score display in the LCD screen

The large LCD screen allows recorded data or loaded music data to be displayed as a musical score. You can enjoy the convenience of playing from a score, or checking the score of a song you recorded.

Furthermore, the instrument features a color LCD panel for great visibility and comfortable operation.

Video output of lyrics (AT-80SL)

You can connect a television to view the lyrics from SMF music files.

Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise instructions.

• Button names are enclosed in square brackets ( c 1 1 ) , as in [Harmony Intelligence] button.
• On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets <<> , as in Exit .
• [+] [-], [] [▼], [] [▲] means that you should press one or the other button. Example: Value [-][+] buttons, Reverb [] [▼] buttons, Tempo [] [▲] buttons.
• The text incorporates AT-80SL screen shots and panel diagrams. Thus, there will be some portions where the information differs from that for the AT-60SL.
• For easier readability, some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual screens and colors.
• The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called "touching."
• An asterisk (*) or a at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution. These should not be ignored.
  (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.

Contents

USING THE UNIT SAFELY 3

Important Notes. 5

Main Features. 7

Conventions Used in This Manual 9

Panel Descriptions 16

Before You Start Playing 20

Opening/Closing the Lid 20

Setting Up the Music Rest 20

Connecting the Power Cord. 20

Turning the Power On and Off 20

Turning On the Power 20

Turning Off the Power 21

Using Headphones 21

Using a Microphone 22

Turning On the Lights (AT-80SL) 22

About the Bench 23

Restoring All the Factory Default Settings 23

Restoring All Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings 25

About the Display 26

Understanding the Main and Related Screens 26

Convenient Functions 30

Listening to the Demo Songs 30

Music Assistant Function 32

Music Assistant Search 34

Choose a Keyword for Quick Registration Selection 36

About the Quick Guide function 38

About the Index menu. 38

Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds 40

Selecting Voices 40

About the Voices and Parts 40

Functions of the Upper/Lower/Pedal Bass Sound Select Buttons 41

Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices 42

Selecting Pedal Bass Voice 43

Selecting Solo Voice 44

Selecting a Voice Using the [Others] Button 45

Performing with a Human Voice. 47

Performing with an Active Expression Voice 49

Creating Organ Sounds (Footage) (AT-80SL) 50

Adjust the Volume Balance. 52

Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift) 54

Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard (Drums/SFX) 56

Changing Drums/SFX Sets 57

Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase

(Manual Percussion) 58

Changing the Manual Percussion Sets 59

Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part (Lower Hold) 60

Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance 61

Selecting a Rhythm 61

Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory 62

Rhythm Search 63

Playing Rhythm 65

Starting at the Press of a Button 65

Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard

(Sync Start) 66

Stopping the Rhythm 67

Changing a Rhythm's Tempo 67

Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro 68

Playing Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment 68

Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment 69

Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment (Style Orchestrator).... 69

Playing Chords with Simple Fingering 70

Leading Bass Function 72

A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings (One Touch Program) 74

Using a Rhythm from a Disk 76

Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk 76

Reviewing the Styles on a Music Style Disk 77

Copying Rhythms on Disks into User Memory 78

Restoring the Rhythm Stored in the User Memory to Their Original Factory Settings 80

Copying Rhythms Saved in User Memory to Floppy Disks 81

Changing the Order of the Rhythms Stored in User Memory 83

Changing the Names of Rhythms Stored in User Memory 85

87

Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons .89

Storing Registrations 90

Recalling a Registration 91

How to Recall a Registration (DELAYED) 91

How to Recall a Registration (INSTANT) 91

Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations 92

Automatically Registering When You Switch Panel Settings 93

Assigning a Name to a Registration Set 94

Formatting Disks 96

Saving Registration Sets to a Floppy Disk 98

Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the AT-80SL/60SL 101

Loading a Set of Registrations 101

Loading an Individual Registration 103

Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved on the Floppy Disk (Load Next)... 106

Deleting a Set of Registrations from a Floppy Disk 108

Changing the Order of Registration on Floppy Disk 110

Using Registrations Created on an Earlier Model 111

Chapter 4 Using the Performance Functions. 114

Transposing to a Different Key (Key Transpose) 114

Adjusting the Brightness of the Sound 115

Adding Decay to the Sound (Damper Pedal) 115

Pitch Bend and Vibrato Effects 116

Using the Foot Switches 117

Changing the Function of the Foot Switch 118

Using the Foot Switch to Switch Registrations 119

Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal 120

Adjusting the Depth of the Expression Pedal 121

Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound 122

Adding Harmony to a Melody (Harmony Intelligence) 122

Changing the Type of Harmony Intelligence 122

Adding Modulation to the Sound (Rotary Effect) 124

Rotary Speed 125

Rotary Color 126

Chorus Effect 127

Sustain Effect 128

Changing the Sustain Length 129

Reverb Effect 130

Changing the Reverb Type 131

Changing the Wall Type 132

Changing the Depth of the Reverb 133

Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively 135

Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard 135

Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button) 137

Changing How the Solo Voice Responds 138

Layering the Solo Voice and Lower Voice 138

Changing the Solo Split Point 139

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice ([Bass Split] Button) 140

Changing the Bass Split Point 141

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Pedal [To Lower] Button) 142

Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play 143

What is a Track Button? 144

Displaying the Track Buttons 145

Playing Back Performance Songs Stored on Floppy Disk and SMF Music Files 145

Silencing a Specific Track (Track Mute) 147

Muting Individual Tracks of Performance Data 148

Viewing a Notation 149

Changing the Notation Settings. 150

Recording a Performance 152

Playing Back a Performance Song. 153

Add a Count Sound to Match the Timing (Count In Play) 153

Recording Each Part Separately 154

Re-Recording. 155

Erasing a Performance Song (Song Clear) 156

Changing the Name of a Performance Song (Rename) 156

Saving Performance Songs Onto Floppy Disk 158
Loading Performance Songs Into the AT-80SL/60SL 159
Deleting Performance Songs Stored on Disk. 160
Layering a New Recording onto SMF Music Files 161
Using Song with a Different Tempo Than That of the Performance Song 162
Re-Recording Part of Your Performance (Punch-in Recording) 162
Recording and Layering Drum Parts (Loop Recording) 163
Count-In Recording. 164

Chapter 8 Editing Your Musical Performance Data............165

Deleting a Specific Measure (Delete Measure) 165
Delete the Recording from a Track (Delete Track) 166
Erase Recording (Erase Event) 168
Copying Measures (Copy) 170
Correct Timing Inaccuracies (Quantize) 171

Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms............173

Preparations for Creating User Rhythms. 174

Displaying the Rhythm Customize Screen 174
Selecting the Division 175
Loading the Rhythm 176
Making the Division Settings 177
Editing the Rhythm 178
Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used 181
Deleting Rhythms You Have Created. 182
Changing the Name of a User Rhythm (Rename) 182

Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or Floppy Disk 183

Chapter 10 Various Other Settings 184

Adjusting How the Instrument Responds 184

Turning Aftertouch On/Off 184
Adjusting the Depth of Aftertouch 184
Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity 185
Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony 185

Performance Function Settings. 186

Selecting the Range of Keys to Which the Damper Pedal will Apply 186
Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal 186
Selecting the Range of Keys to Which the Pitch Bend/Vibrato Lever will Apply 187
Changing the Pitch Bend Range 188

Rhythm Settings. 188

Turning Chord Hold On/Off 188
Count Down Sound 189
Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Switching Automatically 189

Registration Settings 190

Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are Recalled 190
Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled 190

Composer settings 191

Switching the Display of Lyrics On or Off 191
Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs (Play Transpose) 191
Changing the Metronome Setting 192

Adjusting the Metronome Volume 192
Changing the Sound of the Metronome 193
Setting the Beat 193

Other Settings. 194

Adjust the Standard Pitch (Master Tune) 194
Mic Echo 194
Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers. 195
Setting the PC Number. 195
MIDI IN Mode 196
Selecting the MIDI Transmit Channel 196
Repositioning the Touch Screen. 197
Displaying a Graphic at Power-up (AT-80SL) 198
Deleting an Image Stored in Internal Memory 199
Switching the Background of the Main Screen 200
Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the Main Screen. 201
Using the V-LINK function 201

Chapter 11 Connecting with External Device. 203

Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors (AT-80SL) 203
Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors (AT-60SL) 204
Connecting to Audio Equipment 205
Connecting a Computer 206
Connecting a MIDI Devices 207
Connecting MIDI Devices 208
Connecting a Television to View the Lyrics (AT-80SL) 209
Switching the TV Format 209
Connecting External Speakers or an external Reverb Unit to Broaden the Reverb
(RSS Reverb) (AT-80SL). 210
Switching the Aux Out On/OFF 210
Switching the Aux Out Mode. 210

Appendices

Troubleshooting 213
Error Message 218
Voice List (AT-80SL) 220
Voice List (AT-60SL) 223
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-80SL) 225
Drums/SFX Set List (AT-60SL) 229
Manual Percussion List (AT-80SL) 233
Manual Percussion List (AT-60SL) 234
Instruments List (Rhythm Customize Function) 235
Rhythm List (AT-80SL) 242
Rhythm List (AT-60SL) 244
Music Style Disk List (AT-80SL/60SL). 246
Chord List 247
Glossary 249
About ATELIER Series Sound Generator 250
Replacing the Illumination Bulbs (AT-80SL Only) 251
Before you continue 251
Required items 251

Panel illumination 251

Remplacement des ampôules (AT-80SL) 253

Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off 255

Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off 255
Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons 255
Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons 255

Demo Song List 257

Short Cut List 260

Main Specifications 261

Index 264

Panel Descriptions

AT-80SL

1. [Power On] switch p. 20
2. Panel Speaker
3. Part Balance [▲] [▼] buttons → p. 52
   Part Balance Indicator
4. Pedal Bass Voice select buttons p. 43
   Pedal Organ Part
   Pedal Orchestral Part
   [To Lower] button p. 142
   [Bass Split] button p. 140
5. Lower Voice select buttons Lower Organ Part Lower Symphonic Part Lower Orchestral Part [Alternate] button Level [A][▼] buttons p. 52 Level indicator p. 52
6. Touch Screen p. 26
7. Harmony Intelligence button p. 122
8. Transpose [-] [+ ] buttons p. 114

9.Composer p.143

[Reset] button
[Play/Stop] button
[Rec] button p. 143
[Song] button
[Registration] button p. 101
[Demo] button p. 30, p. 146

1. Floppy Disk Drive p. 76, p. 96, p. 145

2. Upper Voice select buttons p. 42
   Upper Organ Part
   Upper Symphonic Part
   Upper Orchestral Part
   [Alternate] button
   Level [▲] [▼] buttons p. 52
   Level indicator p. 52

3. Solo Voice select buttons p. 44

Solo Part
[To Lower] button p. 137
[Alternate] button
Level [▲] [▼] buttons → p. 52
Level indicator p. 52

13. Lower

[Drums/SFX] button p. 56

[Manual Perc] button p. 58

14. Lower Voice [Hold] button p. 60

15. Sustain p. 128

[Pedal] button

[Lower] button

[Upper] button

16. Rhythm select buttons p. 61

Style Orchestrator buttons p. 69

Tempo [ ] [ ] buttons p. 67

Fill In [To Variation] button p. 69

Fill In [To Original] button p. 69

[Break] button p. 69

[Count Down] button p. 68

[Intro/Ending] button p. 65, p. 66, p. 67

[Sync Start] button p.66

[Start/Stop] button p. 65, p. 67

Arranger [On/Off] button p. 68

[One Touch Program] button p. 74

17. [Brilliance] slider p. 115

1. [Master Volume] slider p. 20

2. [Bender/Vibrato] lever p. 116

3. Rotary Sound p. 124

[On/Off] button

[Fast/Slow] button

21. Registration buttons

[Write] button p. 90

[Manual] button p. 93

Registration [1]–[12] buttons → p. 89

[Load Next] button p. 106

1. [Power On] switch p. 20
2. Panel Speaker
3. Part Balance [▲] [▼] buttons → p. 52
4. Pedal Bass Voice select buttons p. 43

Pedal Organ Part

Pedal Orchestral Part

[To Lower] button p. 142

[Bass Split] button p. 140

1. Lower Voice select buttons p. 42

Lower Organ Part

Lower Symphonic Part

Lower Orchestral Part

[Alternate] button

Level [ ][ ] buttons p. 52

1. Touch Screen p. 26
2. [Harmony Intelligence] button p. 122
3. Transpose [-] [+ ] buttons p. 114

9.Composer p.143

[Reset] button
[Play/Stop] button
[Rec] button p. 143
[Song] button
[Registration] button p. 101
[Demo] button p. 30, p. 146

1. Floppy Disk Drive p. 76, p. 96, p. 145

2. Upper Voice select buttons p. 42

Upper Organ Part

Upper Symphonic Part

Upper Orchestral Part

[Alternate] button

Level [▲] [▼] buttons → p. 52

1. Solo Voice select buttons p. 44

Solo Part

[Alternate] button

[To Lower] button p. 137

Level [▲] [▼] buttons → p. 52

13. Lower

[Drums/SFX] button p. 56

[Manual Perc] button p. 58

1. Lower Voice [Hold] button p. 60

15. Sustain p. 128

[Pedal] button

[Lower] button

[Upper] button

16. Rhythm select buttons p. 61

Style Orchestrator buttons p. 69

Tempo [][] buttons p. 67

Fill In [To Variation] button p. 69

Fill In [To Original] button p. 69

[Count Down] button p. 68

[Intro/Ending] button p. 65, p. 66, p. 67

[Sync Start] button p. 66

[Start/Stop] button p. 65, p. 67

Arranger [On/Off] button p.68

[One Touch Program] button p. 74

1. [Brilliance] slider p. 115

2. [Master Volume] slider p. 20

3. [Bender/Vibrato] lever p. 116

20. Rotary Sound p. 124

[On/Off] button

[Fast/Slow] button

21. Registration buttons

[Write] button p. 90

[Manual] button p. 93

Registration [1]-[8] buttons p. 89

[Load Next] button p. 106

Before You Start Playing

Opening/Closing the Lid

1. To open the lid, hold it with both hands and lift it straight up. Then, slide it to the rear.
2. To close the lid, slowly pull it forward until it stops. Then, gently lower it into place.

NOTE

Be careful not to get your fingers caught when opening or closing the lid. Adult supervision is recommended when small children are going to be using the instrument.

NOTE

To prevent accidents, be sure to close the lid before moving the organ.

NOTE

Make sure you don't have anything (such as sheet music) on the keyboard when you close the lid.

Setting Up the Music Rest

1. Lift the music rest gently.
2. To collapse the music rest, fold in the metal fittings while supporting the music rest with hand and gently fold down the stand.

NOTE

Do not apply excessive force to the installed music rest.

Connecting the Power Cord

1. First, make sure that the [Power On] switch at the panel's left side is OFF (not pushed in).

Upper position

1. Connect the supplied power cord to the AC Inlet connector, then plug the other end into an AC outlet.

NOTE

Only use the power cord supplied with this instrument.

NOTE

Whenever you do not intend to use the instrument for extended periods of time, pull out the power cord from the AC outlet.

Turning the Power On and Off

NOTE

Once the connections have been completed, turn on or off power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning on or off devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices.

■Turning On the Power

1. Make sure of the following before the power is turned on.

2. Is the power cord correctly connected to the AC inlet?

3. Is the power cord correctly connected to the AC outlet?
4. Is the [Master Volume] slider (located at the left of the Lower Keyboard) set to the Min (minimum) position?

1. Press the [Power On] button to turn on the power.

The Power indicator lights in red.

This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally.

1. The [Master Volume] slider located on the left of the Lower Keyboard panel is an overall control for adjusting the volume of the entire instrument.

Now adjust the [Master Volume] slider to a suitable level. The volume will be increased when the Expression Pedal is pressed down, and decreased when the pedal is returned.

■Turning Off the Power

1. Before switching the power off, set the [Master Volume] slider to the Min (minimum) position.
2. Press the [Power On] button to turn off the power.

Using Headphones

The AT-80SL/60SL features a Phones jack. This allows you to play without having to worry about bothering others around you, even at night.

1. Connect your headphones to the [Phones] jack underneath the left side of the keyboard.

The sound from the built-in speakers stops.

Now, sound is heard only through the headphones.

Phones

1. Adjust the headphones volume with the [Master Volume] slider and Expression pedal.

Accepts connection of Stereo headphones.

Some Notes on Using Headphones

CAUTION

• To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones only by the headset or the plug.
• Headphones may be damaged if the volume is too high when they are plugged in. Lower the volume on the AT80SL/60SL before plugging in headphones.
• To prevent possible auditory damage, loss of hearing, or damage to the headphones, the headphones should not be used at an excessively high volume. Use the headphones at a moderate volume level.

Using a Microphone

The AT-80SL/60SL is equipped with a Mic jack.

Since this instrument has a Mic In jack, you can use a microphone to enjoy a variety of possibilities such as singing along with your performance, or singing along with SMF music files (sold separately).

1. Connect your microphone to the [Mic In] jack underneath the left side of the keyboard.
2. Use the [Mic Volume] knob to adjust the volume level for the microphone.

You can adjust the depth of the echo applied to sound from the microphone (p. 194).

The microphone must be purchased separately. When purchasing a microphone, please consult the vender where you bought the AT-80SL/60SL.

(AT-80SL only)

If the Input switch is set to "RSS," RSS reverb will be applied to the sound from the microphone. You can use the [Mic Volume] knob to adjust the microphone volume (p. 210).

Some Notes on Using a Microphone

CAUTION

• To avoid disturbing others, be careful of the volume level when playing late at night or very early in the morning.
• When connecting a microphone to the AT-80SL/60SL, be sure to lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by the speakers.

• Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:

• Changing the orientation of the microphone.

• Relocating the microphone so it is farther from the speakers.
• Lowering volume levels.

Turning On the Lights (AT-80SL)

After turning on the power, turn on the [Illumination] switch (located underneath the left-hand side of the keyboard).

On Illumination

The panel illumination of the instrument will light.

Cautions When Using Illumination

CAUTION

When the illumination is used for an extended period, the light bulbs and the metal parts near the light bulb (see diagram below) will become hot. Be careful not to touch these areas. In particular, be careful of the following locations.

1. Panel illumination light bulb

Do not touch the light bulb or nearby parts. When closing the lid, be sure to hold the handles.

1. Metal fittings of the cover

After closing the lid, do not touch this area.

The bulbs used for illumination can be replaced. For details on replacing a bulb, refer to "Replacing the Illumination Bulbs (AT-80SL Only)" (p. 251).

About the Bench

The bench seat can be opened, and sheet music and other items can be stored inside.

Caution When Using the Bench

CAUTION

When opening/closing the seat, be careful not to pinch your fingers.

Restoring All the Factory Default Settings

You can restore all of the settings stored in the AT-80SL/ 60SL to what they were when the instrument shipped from the factory. This function is called "Factory Reset."

1. Make sure there is no floppy disk in the disk drive before carrying out the procedure.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. In the System screen, touch to open the Utility screen.

1. In the Utility screen, touch .

To restore all settings other than the User memory (p. 62) to their original factory settings, touch .

The confirmation message appears on screen.

If you touch , the Factory Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the System screen.

1. When you touch <OK> , the Factory Reset operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.

NOTE

Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!

NOTE

Loading factory default settings will erase any Registrations currently in the memory of the AT-80SL/60SL. To save the registrations you are currently using, refer to "Saving Registration Sets to a Floppy Disk" (p. 98).

NOTE

To reset only the User memory (p. 62) to its original factory settings, refer to p. 78.

You can also use the following method to return to the factory-set condition.

1. Make sure there is no floppy disk in the disk drive before carrying out the procedure.
2. Turn down the volume to the minimum level, then turn off the power.
3. While holding down the [One Touch Program] button, press the [Power On] switch to turn the power on.

The following screen appears.

Factory Preset is Loaded.

NOTE

Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!

Restoring All Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings

You can restore all of the settings other than the User memory (p. 62) to their original factory settings.

This function is called "Panel Reset."

What is the User Memory?

The User memory is the area within the instrument where User rhythms you create as well as rhythms from Music Style Disks are stored.

You can also copy rhythms (p. 78) saved on floppy disks to the User memory.

1. Make sure there is no floppy disk in the disk drive before carrying out the procedure.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The System screen appears.

1. In the System screen, touch to open the Utility screen.

1. In the Utility screen, touch .

The confirmation message appears on screen.

If you touch <Cancel> , the Panel Reset will not be performed, and you will return to the System screen.

1. When you touch <OK> , the Panel Reset operation will begin, and the settings will return to the factory-set condition.

NOTE

Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress!

NOTE

To reset only the User memory (p. 62) to its original factory settings, refer to p. 80.

About the Display

The AT-80SL/60SL makes use of a Touch Screen. This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by touching the screen lightly.

Understanding the Main and Related Screens

Main Screen

Number	Explanations
1	Tempo
2	Measure
3	Beat
4	Bouncing Ball A ball will bounce in time with the rhythm or song.
5	Transpose Displays the transpose setting.
6	Chord Name Displays the name of the chord that is played in the lower keyboard.
7	Indication button Pressed to choose which name to have indicated; either the Rhythm Name, Song Name, or Registration Name.
8	Rhythm Name/Song Name/Registration Name
9	Digital H-Bar (AT-80SL only) You can display the Footage screen (p. 50).
10	Voice Name Displays the name of the upper keyboard voice.
11	MUSIC ASSIST (Music Assistant) Press this when you want to use the Music Assistant function (p. 32).
12	Sound/Kbd (Sound/Keyboard) Select a voice (tone), or make settings for the effect depth, keyboard, etc.

NOTE

The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system (e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual.

NOTE

The Touch Screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger. Pressing hard, or using a hard object can damage the Touch Screen. Be careful not to press too hard, and be sure to use only your fingers to operate the Touch Screen.

NOTE

The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced due to changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If this happens, follow the steps in "Repositioning the Touch Screen" (p. 197) to correct the pointer position.

NOTE

Do not place items on the touch screen.

MEMO

You can adjust the brightness of the screen (p. 203, p. 204).

MEMO

You can set the Main screen so that the bouncing ball does not appear (p. 201).

Number	Explanations
13	Rhythm Play the internal rhythms, and play disk rhythms or copy them in internal memory. Rhythm-related settings can also be made here.
14	Registration Load registrations from disk into internal memory, or save registrations to disk. Registration-related settings can also be made here.
15	Rec/Play Play back or record a song. You can also view a score display while a song plays.
16	System Make various settings.
17	Quick Guide Displays the Quick Guide screen. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, you can press the keyboard, a button, or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen (p. 38).

V-LINK	This icon is displayed when the V-LINK function is on. →V-LINK function (p. 201)
SMF	This icon is displayed when the instrument contains SMF music files.
EDITED	This icon is displayed when any portion of the recorded song has been altered.
	This icon appears in the display when an Active Expression voice is selected. →Active Expression Voice (p. 49)
EX	This icon appears in the display when an EX voice is selected. →Ex Voice (p. 45)

About the principal icons and the Utility screen

Button	Meaning
	Depending on the function, some screens are spread over multiple pages. You can touch < > to display the next or previous page of the screen.
Exit	Touch this when you want to exit (close) the currently displayed screen. Normally, touching < > several times takes you back to the Main screen.

Sub-windows

You can touch in the Main screen or in other screens to access a screen like the following.

This type of screen is called a "sub-window."

When you touch a menu in the sub-window, the subwindow will close, and the selected menu screen will appear.

In a sub-window, touch to exit the subwindow.

Sub-windows for setting values

When you are making settings in the System screen, the following type of screen appears.

Factory	Return to the factory settings.
- +	Modify the value.

Convenient Functions

Listening to the Demo Songs

The AT-80SL/60SL provides demo songs. Here's how to play the Demo songs, and fully appreciate the sounds, Rhythms, and Automatic Accompaniment that are available with the AT-80SL/60SL.

1. Make sure that a floppy disk is not inserted in the disk drive.

If a floppy disk is in the disk drive, press the Eject button and remove the floppy disk.

2. Press the [Demo] button to make the indicator light.

The Demo Screen appears.

3. Touch <> or <> on screen to select the demo song.

4. Touch < ▶> to start playback of the demo song. When the selected demo song ends, the next demo song will begin playing.

For details on the composer of each demo song and their profiles, refer to "Demo Song List" (p. 257).

1. Touch < 1 > to stop playback of the demo song.
2. Press the [Demo] button to exit the demonstration screen.

If the following screen appears

If the performance song in the unit has not been saved to floppy disk, the following message appears, and it will not be possible to play the Demo songs.

1. If you want to delete the performance data, touch .

If you do not want to delete the performance data, touch .

You can play/stop the demo songs by pressing the panel [Play/Stop] button.

The performance data can be saved on a floppy disk. If you wish to save the musical data to a floppy disk, refer to "Saving Performance Songs Onto Floppy Disk" (p. 158).

All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws.

The data for the Demo song that is being played is not available at the MIDI Out connector.

Music Assistant Function

A collection of the world's best, most well-known songs were carefully selected, then the optimum panel settings for each of them were determined, and the resulting data was stored inside the instrument.

Simply select the keyword that most closely suggests the character of the song you have in mind, and a rhythm performance, a sound for the melody, and other selections will be made for you. Once you've selected a keyword, all you have to do is play the keyboard to start performing.

1. Display the Main screen.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Music Assistant screen appears.

If some other screen is displayed, touch to close the currently open screen.

3. Touch <><> to switch screens, and touch a keyword appropriate for the character of the song.

The Registration buttons [1]-[4] flash.

Panel settings appropriate for the keyword will automatically be called up for the Registration [1]-[4] buttons.

4. On the Lower keyboard, play a chord.

At the moment you play the keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play.

5. Press a Registration button from [1] through [4] to switch the panel settings.

6. To end the Music Assistant function, press the [One Touch Program] button, extinguishing its indicator.

Music Assistant Search

You can specify a song name and other search terms and use these for a Music Assistant search.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Music Assistant screen appears.

2. Touch on the Music Assistant screen.

A sub-window appears.

Searching by Music Assistant name

3. Touch .

If some other screen is displayed, touch to close the currently open screen.

4. Decide which character you will use for the search.

The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.

Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching ABC in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group ("A"→"B"→"C"...).

Touch <ABC/123> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.

5. Touch (Start Search).

The results of the search appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

6. Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant.

Touch to return to the Music Assistant screen.

Searching by conditions

3. Touch.

You can use four different criteria in searches: "Tempo," "Rhythm," "Genre," and "Scene."

4. Touch the value for the search term.

5. Touch < - > < +> to adjust the settings.

6. Touch (Start Search).

The results of the search appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

7. Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant.

Touch to return to the Music Assistant screen.

Choose a Keyword for Quick Registration Selection

You can select a voice appropriate for your performance by selecting from keywords representing your situation, location, musical genre, etc. You can call up registrations created by top-level organizers, and refer to them for hints on how to select and layer sounds when creating your own registrations.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The sub-window appears.

2. Touch .

The Quick Registration screen appears.

3. Touch a button that shows a Quick Registration group.

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a Quick Registration group.

4. In the sub-window, touch a sound Quick Registration group name to select the desired Quick Registration group.

The sub-window closes, and the Quick Registration screen returns to the display.

5. Touch , , or , switching the respective button's indicator on or off, to select the keyboard to which the voice is to be assigned.

Setting	Keyboard for which you select a voice
Upper	Upper keyboard
Lower	Lower keyboard
Pedal	Pedalboard

6. Touch <> <> to switch pages, and touch the desired keyword.

The voice will be assigned to the selected keyboard.

Repeat Steps 5 and 6 if you want to make any further changes in the voice setting.

About the Quick Guide function

The AT-80SL/60SL offers a Quick Guide function, which makes it easy for you to access various functions. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, you can press the keyboard, a button, or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The following Quick Guide screen appears for several seconds.

2. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, press a button, keyboard, pedal, or foot switch.

You will be taken to the screen that contains settings related to the button, keyboard, pedal, or foot switch that you pressed.

3. Make settings in the screen to which you jumped.

4. When you are finished making settings, touch to close the screen.

The Main screen appears.

About the Index menu

In the Quick Guide screen, you can touch to access the Index Menu. In the Index Menu screen, you can touch a keyword to jump to the setting screen for that keyword.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The following Quick Guide screen.

If some other screen is displayed, touch to close the currently open screen.

For more on keys, buttons, and controllers that can be used with the Quick Guide function, refer to "Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off" (p. 255).

1. While the Quick Guide screen is displayed, touch . The following screen appears.

1. Touch a letter of the alphabet A-W to select the first letter of the desired keyword.

The Quick Guide Index screen appears, and the keywords will be displayed.

1. Touch the desired keyword.

The setting screen for the specified keyword appears.

1. Make settings in the setting screen that appeared.
2. Touch.

The Main screen appears.

Chapter 1 Selecting and Playing Sounds

Selecting Voices

You can play the sounds of various instruments on the AT-80SL/60SL. These sounds are called "Voices."

About the Voices and Parts

The AT-80SL/60SL has two manual keyboards and a pedalboard. From top to bottom these are called the "Upper Keyboard," "Lower Keyboard," and "Pedalboard."

Three parts, "Organ," "Symphonic," and "Orchestral" are assigned to the Upper and Lower keyboards, respectively, and you can select one voice from each part. Plus, with the addition of the "Solo" part voice, you can have up to three voices playing simultaneously (the Solo voice can be played in either the Upper or Lower keyboard).

The Pedalboard has two parts: "Pedal Organ" and "Pedal Orchestral." You can select one voice for each part, meaning that it is possible to play up to two voices simultaneously.

Keyboard	Parts
Upper Keyboard	Upper Organ
	Upper Symphonic
	Upper Orchestral
	Solo (This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower] button be extinguished)
Lower Keyboard	Lower Organ
	Lower Symphonic
	Lower Orchestral
	Solo (This voice is sounded only when the Solo [To Lower] button lights up)
Pedalboard	Pedal Organ
	Pedal Orchestral

To play a Solo voice on the Lower keyboard, select the Solo voice and press the Solo [To Lower] button (p. 137).

To play a Pedal Bass voice on the Lower keyboard, select the Pedal Bass voice and press the [Bass Split] button (p. 140).

Functions of the Upper/Lower/Pedal Bass Sound Select Buttons

AT-80SL

Each time you press a voice button, its indicator will switch between being lit and being turned off. Voices that have their button indicator lit can be played.

Two voices of the same family are assigned to each voice button. Buttons with voices from two different families have the names of both voices printed on them.

The [Alternate] button switches between these two voices.

The [Alternate] button	Voice that will be selected
The [Alternate] button is not lit.	The voice indicated on the button is selected.
The [Alternate] button is lit.	Another voice of the same family or the voice indicated on the bottom half of the button is selected.

NOTE

No sounds are produced, even when the keys are played, when the Voice button is unlit and all footage voices are off.

Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices

Press the "Organ," "Symphonic," or "Orchestral" buttons for each Keyboard (Upper/Lower) to select the desired voice.

When the power is turned on, the Upper keyboard will play "Full Organ1" and the Lower keyboard will play "Lower Organ1."

Example: Selecting "Full Organ 5" for the Upper Organ, "Strings 5" for the Upper Symphonic, and Upper Orchestral "Grand Piano" for the Upper Orchestral.

1. Press the Upper Organ [Full 2] button (indicator lights).

The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.

Now when you play the Upper keyboard, the "Full Organ 2" will sound.

2. Press the Upper Organ [Alternate] button (the indicator lights).

When you play the Upper keyboard, the "Full Organ 5" will sound.

Each time you press the [Alternate] button you will switch between the two voices which are assigned the button.

3. Press the Upper Symphonic [Strings] button (the indicator lights).

Now when you play the Upper keyboard, the two voices "Full Organ 5" and "Strings 5" will sound simultaneously (mixed together).

4. Press the Upper Orchestral [Piano] button (the indicator lights).

When you play the Upper keyboard, "Grand Piano" will be added, producing a mixture of three different voices.

The lower voice can be selected in the same way as the upper voice.

Selecting Pedal Bass Voice

Immediately after the power is turned on, the Pedal Bass voice will sound single notes using the "Organ Bass1" voice.

Press the buttons of the various parts of "Pedal Organ" and "Pedal Orchestral" to select voices.

AT-80SL

Example: Select "Pipe Org. Bs" for the Pedal Organ part, and select "String Bass" for the Pedal Orchestral part

1. Press the Pedal Organ [Pipe] button (indicator lights).

The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.

Now when you play the Pedalboard, "Pipe Org. Bs" (Pipe Organ Bass) will be heard.

2. Press the Pedal Orchestral [String] button (indicator lights).

Now when you play the Pedalboard, the two voices Pipe Organ Bass and String Bass will sound simultaneously (mixed together).

Normally, playing the pedalboard will sound one note at a time. Settings can be adjusted to allow multiple notes to be played on the Pedalboard (p. 185).

If you press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator lights p. 142) or [Bass Split] button (indicator lights p. 140), the Pedal Bass voice can now be played by the Lower keyboard, not by the Pedalboard.

AT-80SL have the [Octave Up] button. Play the Pedalboard once more. Notice that when the [Octave Up] button is on, the selected Pedal Bass voice will sound an octave higher.

Selecting Solo Voice

The Solo section of the Upper keyboard is monophonic, that is, the Solo voice will only sound for the highest note played on the Upper keyboard. This allows you to play full chords and have the selected Solo voice playing the highest (solo) note.

AT-80SL

Example: Selecting "Trumpet" for the Solo part

1. Press the Solo [Trumpet] button (indicator lights).

The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds.

Play the Upper keyboard. The selected voice will sound by the highest note played.

When you press the [Alternate] button, the two voices assigned to the button will alternate.

By pressing the Solo [To Lower] button, you can play the Solo voice from the Lower keyboard. For details refer to "Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button)" (p. 137).

It is possible to change how a Solo voice will sound. Normally, the Solo voice will be sounded by the highest note you play on the Upper keyboard, but you can make settings so that the last-played note will sound the Solo voice. For details, refer to "Changing How the Solo Voice Responds" (p. 138).

Selecting a Voice Using the [Others] Button

Notice that there is an [Others] button for each part. By using the [Others] button, you can select all voices.

As with the other voice buttons, the [Others] button can be assigned two voices (one voice for "Pedal Organ" and one for "Pedal Orchestral"). You can use the [Alternate] button to switch between these two voices.

1. Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice to select ON (lit) or OFF (dark).

The setting of the [Alternate] button: ON (lit) or OFF (dark), determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned.

2. Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice.

The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds.

3. Touch a button that shows a sound group.

Step 1 is unnecessary in the case of Pedal Bass Part.

NOTE

When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in the display screen, but the basic screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen.

If you want to change the voice for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the Others Voice screen appears in the display.

A voice indicated by is called an "EX voice." These voices are especially recommended.

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.

4. In the sub-window, touch a sound group name to select the desired sound group.

The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.

The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the specified sound group.

5. Touch <><> to switch screens, and touch a voice name to select a voice.

6. Once again, press the blinking [Others] button to confirm the voice.

The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.

You can touch in the Voice Select screen to have only the Active Expression voices be displayed. "Active Expression voices" can be assigned to the [Others] buttons of the Upper Orchestral part, Lower Orchestral part, Pedal Orchestral part, and Solo part. For more on the active expression voices, refer to "Performing with an Active Expression Voice" (p. 49).

You can also confirm the voice by touching in the Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.

For more information about the voices that can be assigned to an [Others] button, please refer to "Voice List" (p. 220).

Performing with a Human Voice

In addition to sounds such as organ and piano, you can also play "human voice," which produces a vocal-like sound.

1. Press the [Alternate] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice to select ON (lit) or OFF (dark).

The setting of the [Alternate] button: ON (lit) or OFF (dark), determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned.

2. Press the [Others] button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice.

The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds.

3. Touch a button that shows a sound group.

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.

For more information about the voices that can be assigned to an [Others] button, please refer to "Voice List" (p. 220).

Step 1 is unnecessary in the case of Pedal Bass Part.

When you press the [Others] button, the Others Voice screen appears in the display screen, but the Main screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen.

If you want to change the voice for the [Others] button, press the [Others] button once more, then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the Others Voice screen appears in the display.

4. In the sub-window, touch .

The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.

The Others Voice screen appears, showing the sounds of the Human Voice group.

The Others Voice screen will appear, and the sounds of the Human Voice group will appear.

5. Touch <><> to switch the screen, and touch a voice name to select the desired voice.

6. Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose sound you wish to set to confirm the voice.

The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit.

For some human voices, such as "Jazz Scot," the sound will change depending on the strength at which you play the keyboard. If the Utility menu setting "Initial Touch" (p. 185) is "OFF," the sound will not change in response to the dynamics of your keyboard playing.

You can also confirm the voice by touching Exit in the Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.

Performing with an Active Expression Voice

Some voices are "Active Expression voices," for which advancing the expression pedal will not only vary the volume, but will also add other voices.

1. Touch the [Others] button of the Part to which you want to assign an Active Expression voice.

"Active Expression voices" can be assigned to the [Others] buttons of the Upper Orchestral part, Lower Orchestral part, Pedal Orchestral, and Solo part. The Others Voice screens appear.

2. Touch a button that shows a sound group.

A sub-window appears, allowing you to select a sound group.

3. In the sub-window, touch (Active Expression Voice).

The indicator of the selected [Others] button will blink.

The Others Voice (Others Voice Select) screen appears, and only the Active Expression Voices from the entire collection are displayed.

4. Touch <><> to change screens, and touch a voice name.

5. Once again, press the [Others] button for the part whose sound you wish to set to confirm the voice.

The indicator of the [Others] button will change from blinking to lit. An active expression voice will be selected.

For details on the active expression voices that are available, refer to "Voice list" (p. 220).

NOTE

Although you can select an Active Expression voice with the [Others] button for parts other than Lower Orchestral, Upper Orchestral, Pedal Orchestral, and Solo, no Active Expression effect is

applied. The

(Active Expression) icon does not appear when an Active Expression voice is selected for a part for which the Active Expression effect is not being used.

Sounds marked by

"..support the

Active Expression function.

You can also confirm the voice by touching in the Others Voice (Other Voice select) screen. You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting.

Creating Organ Sounds (Footage) (AT-80SL)

You can touch in the Main screen of the AT-80S to display the Footage screen. The sliders displayed in the screen are called "harmonic bars." The Footage Tablets that allow you to create a wide variety of organ sounds by combining voices of different pitches.

Footage Screen

By touching the harmonic bars and sliding them, you can adjust the volume of each footage.

The volume can be adjusted over nine steps (0-8).

When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way (8), the volume is loudest. When it is pushed in all the way (0), there will be no sound.

Footage Voices of Differing Pitch (feet)

As the number decreases, the pitch will become correspondingly higher. The Footage are organized as follows.

1 octave 5th root 1 octave 1 octave 2 octave 2 octave 3 octave below 5th 5th 3rd 5th

You can touch < / L > to switch between the Upper Footage screen and Lower Footage screen.

The Footage screen will be displayed for several seconds, then it will close automatically.

If you touch, the screen continues to be displayed until you touch. When you touch the Footage screen and then change the settings, the screen is held in that condition.

1. Display the Main screen.

2. Touch on the Main screen.

You can adjust the volume of individual footages by touching and sliding (dragging) the harmonic bars.

Try layering combinations of pitches for the various footages.

3. Touch the Percussion < 4^> or < 22/3^ > .

Play the Upper keyboard and notice that an attack has been added.

What is the Percussion?

These add a crisp sound with an attack to the Footage voices of the Upper part.

Button	Explanation
Percussion <4'>	Percussion one octave above
Percussion <2 2/3'>	Percussion one octave and a fifth above
<Fast Decay>	Shortens the decay time of the percussion (short percussion)

4. Touch Percussion .

The percussive sound will decay more quickly.

5. Touch.

The Main screen appears in the display, and the Digital H-Bar icon lights. To switch the Footage off, touch in the Main screen; the icon disappears.

NOTE

Pitch bend, glide, and sustain effects are not applied to the footage.

NOTE

Percussion < 4^> and < 22/3^ cannot be used simultaneously.

Adjust the Volume Balance

The AT-80SL/60SL allows you to adjust the volume balance individually for each Part.

AT-80SL

The following buttons are used to adjust the volume of a multiple number of Parts.

Button	Part
Accomp/SMF [▲] [▼] button	Automatic Accompaniment (except Bass)
	Playback of performance songs from something other than the Atelier performance songs (for example: SMF music files)
Rhythm [▲] [▼] button (When the [Manual Perc] button is ON)	Manual percussion
Rhythm [▲] [▼] button (When the [Manual Perc] button is OFF)	Rhythm performance
	Drums/SFX
Pedal Organ [▲] [▼] button	Pedal Organ voice
	Bass note of automatic accompaniment

1. The volume levels of each part are adjusted using the corresponding [] and [] buttons.

Pressing the upper button ([▲] button) will increase the volume.

Pressing the lower button ([▼] button) will decrease the volume.

The volume can be set to any value from 0 to 12.

When the volume value shown in the display is 0, that part will produce no sound.

You can also press the [▲] button and [▼] button of the part whose volume you wish to adjust, so that the "Part Balance Monitor screen" is displayed for several seconds, allowing you to check the volume balance.

You can check the volume by viewing the Level indicators of each part on AT-80SL.

The Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several seconds and then closes automatically. If you touch , the screen continues to be displayed until you touch .

Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units (Octave Shift)

The pitch of the sound played by the keyboard can be adjusted in one-octave steps. This function is called "Octave Shift." You can apply an Octave shift to all Parts.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch either <UPPER> , <LOWER> , or <PEDAL> .

Menu	Part whose pitch will change
UPPER	To change the pitch of the Upper and Solo part
LOWER	To change the pitch of the Lower part
PEDAL	To change the pitch of the Pedal part

3. Touch <> <> to display the Octave Shift.

4. Touch the part display of the part whose Octave Shift settings you wish to change.

5. Touch < - > < +> to adjust the settings.

The value can be set to a range of + / - 3 octaves.

6. Touch.

You will return to the Upper Keyboard/Lower Keyboard/Pedalboard screen.

You can open the
Pedalboard screen, Lower
Keyboard screen, or Upper
Keyboard screen with
touching,
, and.

When the power is turned on, the Octave Shift setting for each part of the Pedal Bass will be set to -1 (1 octave down).

If you turn on the [Octave Up] button on the AT-80SL, the Octave Shift will be automatically set to "0" regardless of the previous setting. When you turn off the [Octave Up] button on the AT-80SL, the Octave Shift will always return to "-1" regardless of the previous setting.

Please note that when you apply the Octave Shift function to certain voices, their pitch could be stretched beyond their recommended note ranges, and they may not sound as expected. Care should be taken when using Octave Shift.

Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard (Drums/SFX)

You can use the Lower keyboard to play various drum sounds (drum set). In this case, the Lower voices will no longer sound.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

1. Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up.

The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will alternate between on (lit) and off (dark) each time it is pressed.

The Drums/SFX (drums/sound effects) screen will be displayed for several seconds.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

2. Play the Lower keyboard and listen to the various drum sounds on each key.

Refer to "Drum Set List" (p. 225) for details on which drum sound or Sound Effect will be played by each note.

NOTE

It is not possible to select and play both [Drums/ SFX] and [Manual Perc] buttons simultaneously.

NOTE

For some drum sets, there will be keys that do not sound.

Changing Drums/SFX Sets

Immediately after the power is turned on, the POP drum set will sound. As the drum set, you can choose the types of drum set and sound effect. When you change the drum set, the sound produced by each note will change.

1. Press the [Drums/SFX] button, getting its indicator to light up.

The Drums/SFX screen will be displayed for several seconds.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

2. While the Drums/SFX screen is displayed, touch a Drum/SFX set name in the screen.

The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will begin to blink.

AT-80SL

You can select from 18 different Drum Sets and one set of Sound Effects as follows:

POP, R&B, ROCK, JAZZ BRUSH, HIP HOP, VOX DRUM, STANDARD, STANDARD2, ROOM, ROOM2, POWER, ELECTRONIC, TR-808, DANCE, JAZZ, BRUSH, BRUSH2, ORCHESTRA, SOUND EFFECTS

AT-60SL

You can select from 16 different Drum Sets and one set of Sound Effects as follows:

POP, ROCK, JAZZ BRUSH, VOX DRUM, STANDARD, STANDARD2, ROOM, ROOM2, POWER, ELECTRONIC, TR-808, DANCE, JAZZ, BRUSH, BRUSH2, ORCHESTRA, SOUND EFFECTS

3. Press the [Drums/SFX] button once again.

The [Drums/SFX] button indicator will be lit constantly, and the selected Drum Set Type will be applied.

For the types of drum set and the sound effects played by each key, refer to "Drum/SFX Set List" (p. 225).

After the Drums/SFX (drums/sound effects) screen is displayed, it will close automatically after several seconds unless you touch the screen to select a drums/sound effects set. If you wish to switch drums/ sound effect sets, quickly select the desired drums/ sound effect set while the Drums/SFX (drums/ sound effects) screen is displayed.

You can also confirm the Drums/SFX set by touching in the Drums/SFX screen. You can also play the lower manual to confirm the drum set.

Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase (Manual Percussion)

You can play various drum sounds and Sound Effects using the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard. This is convenient when you wish to play the Lower voice together with drum sounds or Sound Effects.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

the keys for Drum sounds or Sound Effects

1. Press the [Manual Perc] button (indicator lights).

The button will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF (dark) each time it is pressed.

The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

2. When you play the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard the chosen drum sound is played on each key.

NOTE

It is not possible to select and play both [Drums/ SFX] and [Manual Perc] buttons simultaneously. (p. 56).

Changing the Manual Percussion Sets

Immediately after the power is turned on, the PERC SET1 drum set will sound.

You can choose the type of Manual Percussion Set. When you change the Manual Percussion Set, the sound played by each of the 15 lowest notes of the Lower keyboard will change.

1. Press the [Manual Perc] button (indicator lights).

The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

2. While the Manual Percussion screen is displayed, touch a manual percussion set name in the screen.

The [Manual Perc] button indicator will begin to flash.

AT-80SL

You can select from 14 different Manual Percussion Sets;

PERC SET1, PERC SET2, PERC SET3, ORCHESTRA SET, ORCHESTRA SET2, LATIN SET, ASIAN SET, VOICE PHRASE, VOICE PHRASE 2, VOICE PHRASE 3, SFX SET, SFX SET 2, JAPANESE SET, JAPANESE SET 2

AT-60SL

You can select from 7 different Manual Percussion Sets;

PERC SET1, PERC SET2, LATIN SET, VOICE PHRASE, VOICE PHRASE2, SFX SET, JAPANESE SET

3. Press the [Manual Perc] button once again.

The [Manual Perc] button indicator will be lit constantly, and the selected Manual Percussion Set will be applied.

Refer to "Drum Set List" (p. 225) for details on which percussion sound will be played by each note.

The Manual Percussion screen will automatically close after several seconds if you do not touch the screen to select a manual percussion set. If you wish to change the manual percussion set, you must select a manual percussion set quickly while the manual percussion screen is displayed.

You can also confirm the Manual Percussion set by touching in the Manual Percussion screen. You can also play the lower manual to confirm the manual percussion set.

Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part (Lower Hold)

You can have Lower voice continue to sound after you release you fingers from the keys, until the next key is played.

AT-80SL

Lower Voice

AT-60SL

Lower Voice

1. Press the Lower Voice [Hold] button (confirm that the indicator is lit).

The Lower voice will continue sounding.

While the Lower Voice [Hold] button is lit, pressing a key will cause the note to continue sounding.

2. When you press the Lower Voice [Hold] button to make the indicator go dark, the notes which had continued to sound will stop.

Chapter 2 Using Rhythm Performance

The AT-80SL/60SL lets you enjoy playing along with a rhythmic accompaniment.

Selecting a Rhythm

The AT-80SL/60SL provides various Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniments (Music Styles).

These are organized into 10 groups.

AT-80SL

Rhythm

AT-60SL

Big Band/ Swing

Country/Gospel

Oldies/ Contempo

Ballad

World

。

一

一

W

Acc

Up

V

A

089

Rhythm

m - 1 0 ;

1. Press a Rhythm button to select a Rhythm group.

The indicator will light.

A Rhythm screen like the following appears.

The rhythms in the selected rhythm group appears in the display.

2. Touch <><> to switch screens, and touch a rhythm name to select the desired rhythm.

The indicator of Rhythm button will blink.

3. Press the Rhythm button once again (indicator lights constantly).

The Rhythm button's indicator will change from blinking to light. The Rhythm has now been applied.

For more on the internal rhythms, refer to the "Rhythm List" (p. 242, p. 244).

You can also open the Rhythm screen by touching in the Main screen.

You can also confirm the rhythm by touching in the Rhythm screen.

Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory

The AT-80SL/60SL features a User memory.

What is the User Memory?

The User memory is the area within the instrument where User rhythms you create as well as rhythms from Music Style Disks are stored.

You can also copy User rhythms saved on floppy disks to the User memory (p. 173).

The AT-80SL/60SL is shipped from the factory with rhythms already stored in User memory. You can replace these rhythms with rhythms loaded in from Music Style Disks, or with User rhythms you've created and saved using the Rhythm Customize function (p. 173).

The content of User memory is retained even while the AT-80SL/60SL's power is turned off.

You can call up rhythms in User memory by pressing the [Disk/User] button.

Calling Up Rhythms Stored in User Memory

1. Press the [Disk/User] button.

The Rhythm screen appears.

1. Touch < > on the Rhythm screen.

The rhythms stored in User Memory are displayed.

1. Touch <><> to switch screens, and touch a rhythm name to select the desired rhythm.

The indicator of [Disk/User] button will blink.

1. After selecting a rhythm, press the flashing [Disk/User] button once more.

The [Disk/User] button stops flashing and remains lit, indicating that the rhythm has been selected.

If you wish to store a disk Rhythm in the User memory, refer to "Copying Rhythms on Disks into User Memory" (p. 78).

If you want to restore the original rhythms that User memory contained at the time the instrument was shipped from the factory, refer to "Restoring the Rhythm Stored in the User Memory to Their Original Factory Settings" (p. 80).

If a floppy disk containing saved rhythms is in the disk drive, then when you

touch < > , the rhythms on the floppy disk are displayed.

You can also confirm the rhythm by touching in the Rhythm screen.

Rhythm Search

You can search for Rhythm that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or other criteria you set.

You can also search Rhythm using the first character of the Rhythm names.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The following Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < 0 > on the Main screen.

A sub-window appears.

If some other screen is displayed, touch to close the currently open screen.

You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing Rhythm buttons.

You can also search only for rhythms other than the internal rhythms accessed with the [Disk/User]

button. The icon does not appear in the display while [Disk/User] button rhythms are displayed.

Searching by Rhythm name

1. Touch.
2. Decide which character you will use for the search.

The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.

Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching ABC in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group ("A"→"B"→"C"…).

Touch <ABC/123> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.

1. Touch (Start Search).

The search results appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

1. Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm.

Touch to return to the Rhythm screen.

Searching by Conditions

1. Touch.

You can use four different criteria in searches: "Tempo," "Beat," "Groove," and "Genre."

1. Touch the value for the search term.
2. Touch < - > < +> to adjust the settings.
3. Touch (Start Search).

The search results appear in the display.

To cancel the search, touch in the Search Results screen.

1. Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm.

Touch to return to the Rhythm screen.

Playing Rhythm

There are two ways to start the Rhythm:

• Manually by pressing the [Start] button,
• Automatically by playing a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard (Sync Start).

You can press (Sync Start) or the [Intro/Ending] button to start the rhythm from the intro, or stop the rhythm at the ending.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

Starting at the Press of a Button

Starting with an Added Intro

1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.

Making the Intro Short and Simple

1. Press the [To Variation] or [To Original] button.

[Start/Stop] button indicator will blink.

The indicator for the [To Variation] or [To Original] button will blink.

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

Starting Without an Intro

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.

The functions of the [Intro/ Ending] button and [Start/ Stop] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 118).

For more on the [To Variation] and [To Original] buttons, refer to "Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment" (p. 69).

Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard (Sync Start)

Starting with an Added Intro

1. Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.
2. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

The [Intro/Ending] button's indicator will blink.

1. Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard.

The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

While the Intro is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark.

Making the Intro Short and Simple

1. Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.
2. Press the [To Variation] or [To Original] button.

[Start/Stop] button indicator will blink.

The indicator for the [To Variation] or [To Original] button will blink.

1. Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard.

A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts.

Starting Without an Intro

1. Press the [Sync Start] button to make the indicator light up.
2. Play either the Lower keyboard or the pedalboard.

The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played.

NOTE

If the Arranger function is ON (the Arranger [On/Off] button indicator is lit), it is not be able to start the Rhythm by playing the Pedalboard (p. 68).

For more on the [To

Variation] and [To

[Original] buttons, refer to

"Adding Variety to the

Rhythm or Automatic

Accompaniment" (p. 69).

Stopping the Rhythm

Stopping with an Ending

1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

An Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.

While the Ending is playing, the [Intro/Ending] button indicator will light, until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off.

Making the Ending Short and Simple

1. Press the [To Variation] or [To Original] button, and then press the [Start/Stop] button.

A short Ending is played, then the Rhythm stops.

Stopping without an Ending

1. Press the [Start/Stop] button.

The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played.

Changing a Rhythm's Tempo

You can change the tempo of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment (p. 68).

Tempo

1. Press the Tempo [←] and [▶] buttons to change the tempo (speed) of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment.

Tempo [▲] button	The tempo becomes slower
Tempo [▲] button	The tempo becomes faster

By pressing the Tempo [ ] and [▶] buttons simultaneously, the tempo is returned to the standard (preset) tempo for the selected Rhythm.

The value of the tempo currently set (20-500 beats per minute) can be checked in the Main screen and Rhythm screen.

MEMO

The functions of the [Intro/ Ending] button and [Start/ Stop] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 118).

If you switch rhythms when "Auto Std Tempo" (p. 189) is on, the tempo changes to match the rhythm. If you switch rhythms when "Auto Std Tempo" is off, the tempo remains unchanged even when you switch the rhythm.

You can confirm the tempo and beat with the "bouncing ball" in the Main screen (p. 26).

Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro

If an intro is played before your performance, you can have a countdown played to the end of the intro, allowing you to understand easily where you are to start playing.

1. Press the [Count Down] button, getting the indicator to light.
2. Press the [Intro/Ending] button.

The intro plays, and a countdown plays to the end of the intro.

When the [Sync Start] button is lit, specifying the chord on the Lower keyboard starts the intro, and again, a countdown is given.

1. To stop the countdown, press the [Count Down] button, turning off the indicator light.

Playing Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment

The Arranger function of the AT-80SL/60SL can add an Automatic Accompaniment to each Rhythm. Based on the selected Rhythm, the Arranger function automatically adds an accompaniment that is suitable for the chord being pressed on the Lower keyboard.

Arranger

On/Off

1. Press the Arranger [On/Off] button (indicator lights.)

Arranger [On/Off] button	Function
Indicator is lit (On)	Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment
Indicator is not lit (Off)	Rhythm (Drums only)

1. Start the rhythm (p. 65).

The rhythm and the automatic accompaniment will play together.

If the Arranger [On/Off] button is ON and no Pedal Bass voice is selected, the Automatic Accompaniment will play the bass sound.

You can change the countdown sound (p. 189).

NOTE

When the Arranger [On/ Off] button is on, Sync Start (p. 66) on the pedalboard cannot be used.

NOTE

The lower voice is not played during the performance of the intro and ending, even when the Lower keyboard is played.

Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment

You can add variety to the rhythm or automatic accompaniment by changing the rhythm pattern of the rhythm or the arrangement of the automatic accompaniment, or by inserting a break (i.e., stopping the rhythm for one measure).

AT-80SL

AT-60SL
Fill In

Button name	Function
Fill In [To Variation] button	After the Fill-In has played, play the Variation Rhythm pattern.
Fill In [To Original] button	After the Fill-In has played, play the Original Rhythm pattern.
[Break] button <AT-80SL only>	Stop the rhythm at the end of that measure (Break).

What's a fill-in?

A Fill In is a short phrase that is inserted at a break in the melody or at a point where the character of the song changes (between Chorus's or Verses).

Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment (Style Orchestrator)

You can change the arrangement of the accompaniment. This function is called "Style Orchestrator." For each rhythm, there are four types of arrangement for the accompaniment.

The following buttons are called Style Orchestrator buttons.

AT-80SL
Style Orchestrator

AT-60SL
Style Orchestrator

1. Press the Style Orchestrator buttons to change the arrangement of the accompaniment.

The indicator of the button you pressed will light.

The [Basic] button produces the simplest arrangement, and the [Full] button produces the most florid.

NOTE

AT-60SL has no [Break] button.

MEMO

The functions of the Fill In [To Variation] button and Fill In [To Original] button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal. Please refer to "Changing the Function of the Foot Switch" (p. 118).

Playing Chords with Simple Fingering

"Chord Intelligence" is a feature that intelligently plays the correct accompaniment chords the moment you play a key specifying a chord on the Lower keyboard during Automatic Accompaniment.

For example, in order to make the instrument detect a "C Major" chord, you must normally play the three keys "C," "E," and "G." If you use the Chord Intelligence function, you can simply press a single "C" key in the lower keyboard to sound a C Major chord with the voice selected for the Lower part.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < 0 (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

For more information about chord fingering, refer to the "Chord List" (p. 247).

You can also open the rhythm screen by pressing a Rhythm button.

If you press the root note of the chord (p. 249) in the lower keyboard when the Chord Intelligence function is off, all notes in that chord will sound.

For example, if you press the root "C" of the C major chord in the lower keyboard, the notes of the C major chord "C," "E," and "G" will be sounded by the voice selected for the lower part.

3. Touch .

The Rhythm Options screen appears.

4. Touch the Chord Intelligence setting to turn it "ON."

The Chord Intelligence function can now be used.

Each time you touch the Chord Intelligence setting, it will be switched ON/OFF.

5. If you wish to turn off the Chord Intelligence function, switch it "OFF."

When the Leading Bass function (p. 72) is on and the Chord Intelligence function is off, you can specify chords with a combination of the lower keyboard and pedalboard.

When you touch the [One Touch Program] button, the Chord Intelligence setting will automatically be turned ON.

Leading Bass Function

When Automatic Accompaniment is used, and the Pedal [To Lower] button is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will normally play the root note (p. 249) of the chord you play on the Lower keyboard.

If the Leading Bass function is enabled, the lowest note of the chord you play on the Lower keyboard will then be used as the bass note (the bottom note of the chord). This allows the bass to be a note other than the root of the chord you play and the bass note will change when inverted chords are played (p. 249).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < 0 (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing the Rhythm buttons.

When the Leading Bass function is on and the Chord Intelligence function (p. 70) is off, you can specify chords with a combination of the lower keyboard and pedalboard.

3. Touch .

The Rhythm Options screen appears.

4. Touch the Leading Bass setting to turn it "ON."

Each time you touch the Leading Bass setting, it will be switched ON/OFF.

5. To turn off the Leading Bass function, set the Leading Bass setting to "OFF."

You can assign the Leading Bass functions to either of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal. Please refer to "Changing the Function of the Foot Switch" (p. 118).

A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings (One Touch Program)

The AT-80SL/60SL provides a very convenient [One Touch Program] button. By simply pressing this button once, the Arranger function will be turned ON, and keyboard voices that are most appropriate for playing with the currently selected Rhythm/Automatic Accompaniment are selected.

By pressing the [One Touch Program] button, you can make the following settings.

• Panel settings (e.g., sounds and volume) suitable for the rhythm
• Arranger [On/Off] button lit (Automatic Accompaniment playing)
• [Sync Start] button lit, [Intro/Ending] button blinking (Waiting for Sync Start)
• Chord Intelligence function is ON (p. 70)

What is Sync Start?

Sync Start is a function that starts the rhythm at the moment that you play the lower keyboard.

What is Chord Intelligence?

"Chord Intelligence" is a feature that intelligently decides on accompaniment chords the moment you play some keys specifying a chord during automatic accompaniment.

The panel settings specified by the One Touch Program function are as follows.

16 panel settings for each rhythm (4 panel settings × 4 groups)

1. Select a Rhythm (p. 61).
2. Press the [One Touch Program] button.

The [One Touch Program] button's indicator will light.

An One Touch Program Group (One Touch Program Group select) screen like the one shown below will be displayed for several seconds.

1. While the One Touch Program Group screen is displayed, touch the screen to select a One Touch Program group.

If you fail to select a One Touch Program group while the One Touch Program Group screen is displayed, "Group 1" will be selected automatically.

Panel settings appropriate for the rhythm and automatic accompaniment will automatically be called up for Registration [1]-[4] buttons.

1. Press the Registration [1] - [4] button to select panel settings.
2. On the Lower keyboard, play a chord.

At the moment you play the lower keyboard, the Intro will begin, and then the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play.

1. Press the [Intro/Ending] or [Start/Stop] button to stop the Rhythm.

Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment stops.

1. Press the [One Touch Program] button, extinguishing its indicator.

You will return to the panel settings that were in effect prior to pressing the [One Touch Program] button.

MEMO

To redisplay the One Touch Program Group screen, while holding down the Registration [Write] button, press the [One Touch Program] button. Touch the One Touch Program Group screen to reselect the group.

MEMO

When you press the [One Touch Program] button, the "Arranger Update" setting will automatically change to "INSTANT" (p. 92).

Using a Rhythm from a Disk

The AT-80SL/60SL contains built-in Rhythms (Music Styles). Additional Rhythms (Music Styles) are available on the Music Style disk included are available. Here's how to select a Rhythm (Music Style) from a Music Style disk.

Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk

1. Hold the floppy disk face up, and push it into the disk drive until it clicks into place.

The disk drive is on the right side of the unit, above the keyboard.

2. Press the Eject button.

The end of the floppy disk comes out of the slot. Gently grasp the end of the floppy disk and pull it out.

NOTE

All rights reserved.

Unauthorized use of
commercially available
Music Style disk for
purposes other than
private, personal
enjoyment is a violation of
applicable laws.

NOTE

If you're using the disk drive for the first time, be sure to read the important notes on p. 6.

NOTE

Never eject a disk while reading or writing is in progress, since that can damage the magnetic surface of the disk, rendering it unusable. (The disk drive's indicator will light up at full brightness when the drive is busy reading or writing data. Ordinarily, the indicator will be less brightly lit, or be extinguished.)

Reviewing the Styles on a Music Style Disk

1. Press the Rhythm [Disk/User] button (confirm that its indicator is lit).

The Rhythm screen appears.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

2. Insert the Music Style disk into the disk drive.

The Rhythm screen will show the Rhythms on the music style disk. Rhythms from the music style disk are indicated by an "图" icon.

3. Touch < Disk> , causing it to light up; the rhythms on the music style disk are displayed.

4. Touch the Rhythm screen to select a Rhythm on the Music Style disk.

The [Start/Stop] button indicator will blink while the Rhythms are being loaded into internal memory.

When loading is finished, you will be able to play the selected rhythm.

5. Press the [Start/Stop] button or the [Intro/Ending] button.

The selected Rhythm is played.

When < > is lit, the rhythms stored in User memory are displayed.

If rhythms from a music style disk are stored in internal memory, you can recall the Rhythms simply by pressing the [Disk/ User] button (p. 78).

Copying Rhythms on Disks into User Memory

While the AT-80SL/60SL comes with rhythms already loaded in its User memory (p. 62), you can replace these with Music Style Disk rhythms. Rhythms loaded from the disk into internal memory will not be lost even if the power is turned off. It is convenient to load frequently-used disk Rhythms into internal memory.

1. Insert the Music Style disk into the disk drive.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

1. Touch < 0> (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Copy To User screen appears.

1. Touch <> <> to select the Music Style Disk rhythm you want to copy to the User memory.

Rhythm [Disk/User] button indicator will blink.

1. After selecting the Music Style Disk Rhythm, touch .

The following screen appears.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

Touch to go back to the previous screen.

1. Touch the screen to switch screens, and touch the save-destination rhythm.

The following screen appears.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

To cancel operation, touch .

At this time, you can press

< > or the [Start/ Stop] button to play the rhythm to make sure of your choice.

8. To store the Rhythm in internal memory, touch .

The saving of the rhythm to internal memory begins.

Once the Rhythm has been accommodated in memory, the Rhythm screen will reappear.

Restoring the Rhythm Stored in the User Memory to Their Original Factory Settings

Use the following procedure to restore only the rhythm stored in the User Memory to their factory settings.

1. Touch on the Main screen.
2. Touch < (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

1. Touch on the Sub-window.

The confirmation message appears on the screen.

1. Touch .

The Rhythm that had been stored in the User Memory button will return to the factory settings.

NOTE

Never remove the disk or turn off the power while the Rhythm data is being loaded from disk into the AT-80SL/60SL. If you do so, the Rhythm data will not be loaded into the AT-80SL/60SL, and malfunctions could result. After returning the Rhythm stored in the [Disk/User] button to the factory settings (see following section), reload the Rhythm from disk.

To restore all of the factory settings, use the Factory Reset operation (p. 23).

You can restore the User Memory to the factory settings in the screen.

1. Press the [Power On] button to turn off the power.
2. Hold down the Rhythm [Disk/User] button, and press the [Power On] button.

Never turn off the power while the following screen is displayed.

Presetting... Don't Power Off

The Rhythm that had been stored in the User Memory will return to the factory settings.

Copying Rhythms Saved in User Memory to Floppy Disks

You can take rhythms saved in User memory (p. 62) and copy them to floppy disks.

1. Make sure that the disk drive contains a disk that was formatted (p. 96) by the ATELIER.
2. Press the Rhythm [Disk/User] button.

The Rhythm screen appears.

1. Touch .
2. Touch the Rhythm name to select the rhythm you want to copy to the floppy disk.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

When < 凹Disk> is lit, the rhythms stored on the floppy disk are displayed.

5. Touch < 0> (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

6. Touch on the Rhythm screen.

The Copy to Disk screen appears.

7. Touch <> <> to select the copy-destination number.

Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as "- - - - - -".

To cancel the copy, touch the button to close the Copy to Disk screen.

8. Touch to copy the rhythm to the floppy disk.

Copying of the rhythm to the floppy disk begins.

When the rhythm is saved, the Rhythm screen returns to the display.

Changing the Order of the Rhythms Stored in User Memory

You can rearrange the order of the rhythms stored in User memory (p. 62).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

2. Touch < 0 (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch .

The Edit User screen appears.

1. Touch <> <> in the screen to select a rhythm.
2. Touch <Up> or <Down> to move the rhythm.

Button	Meaning	Description
Rename	Modify the name	The Rename screen appears. You can touch the screen and rename the selected rhythm (p. 85).
Up	Change the order (upward)	The selected rhythm will be moved earlier in the order.
Down	Change the order (downward)	The selected rhythm will be moved later in the order.
Delete	Delete the Rhythm	The selected rhythm will be deleted (p. 87).

1. Touch.

Changing the Names of Rhythms Stored in User Memory

You can rename rhythms stored in User memory (p. 62).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

1. Touch < 0 (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Edit User screen appears.

1. Touch <><> to select the rhythm whose name you want to change.
2. Touch .

The Rename screen appears.

6. Touch < / abc / 1% > to change among uppercase/ lowercase/symbols.

Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available choice, like this: uppercase lowercase symbols uppercase ....

7. Touch the screen to specify the desired character.

The following characters can be selected.

Uppercase	A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Lowercase	a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Symbols	! " # % & ' ( ) *+, -. / :=? ^_0123456789
Del	Delete a character.
Space	Insert a space.
← →	Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

To cancel the operation, touch .

8. When you're done making the settings, touch .

The Rhythm has now been named. The Edit User screen reappears.

9. Touch.

Deleting Rhythms Stored in User Memory

You can delete rhythms stored in User memory (p. 62).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

1. Touch < 0> (Utility) on the Rhythm screen.

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Edit User screen appears.

1. In the screen, touch <> <> to select the rhythm that you wish to delete.

5. Touch.

The following display appears.

To cancel operation, touch .

6. If you are sure that you wish to delete the rhythm, touch .

When a rhythm is deleted, the deleted rhythm name will change to "----".

Chapter 3 Using the Registration Buttons

The AT-80SL/60SL allows you to store sound settings and panel settings in the Registration buttons. The AT-80SL has a total of twelve registration buttons (the AT-60SL has eight), and one set of panel settings can be registered to each button, for a total of twelve types (eight types on the AT-60SL) of panel settings. Each set of panel settings that has been stored in a Registration button is called a "Registration."

This provides a convenient way to change large numbers of panel settings during a performance, or to recall a complex panel setting.

AT-80SL

Settings that have been stored to Registration buttons [1]-[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]-[8]) are remembered even if the power is turned off. If you wish to restore the settings stored in the Registration buttons to their factory settings, use the "Factory Reset" operation (p. 23).

About the Registration Buttons

In addition to assigning voices and rhythms to the Registration buttons, you can also store the following settings:

• Panel button settings (for example, settings for the Level [▲] [▼] buttons and Solo [To Lower] button)
• Controller settings (functions assigned to foot switches, pitch bend range, etc.)
• Other types of settings (reverb type, tempo settings, degree of initial touch, etc.)

If you would like to know all of the settings that can be recorded to the Registration buttons, refer to “Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off” (p. 255).

Furthermore, you can group the settings assigned to the Registration buttons as a single set, and then register and save up to a maximum of 99 sets onto a single floppy disk (p. 98).

In addition to the settings recorded to the Registration buttons, the following data is also saved when Registration sets are saved to floppy disks.

• Registration Name p. 94
• Registration Shift p. 119
  Arranger Update p. 92
• Trans. Update (Transpose Update) p. 190
• Exp. Curve (Expression Curve) p. 121

Recorded performance data and rhythms from User memory are not stored in Registration sets. When a rhythm saved in User memory is assigned to a Registration set, that rhythm is copied beforehand to the User memory.

Procedure for Creating Registration Sets

You can change voice and other panel settings by pressing the Registration buttons during performance of songs.

Prepare the Registrations

A convenient way to make the sequence of Registration buttons to be pressed easy to understand is to store the panel settings starting from the Registration [1] button, continuing with subsequent buttons in accordance with the progression of the song.

Save the Registrations to the floppy disk

If you want to use more than eight Registrations in a song, save the settings for Registration buttons [1]–[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]–[8]) to a floppy disk as a set, then continue to store further panel settings again, starting from Registration button [1]. Save all of the Registration sets you have set to the floppy disk.

Arrange the Registrations in the sequence they are to be used

Save the Registration sets to the floppy disk in the order they are to be used in the song. You can use the Disk Edit function (p. 110) to alter the sequence and names of rhythms contained on the floppy disk (p. 94) as well as delete such rhythms (p. 108).

Using Registration Sets

Call up the Registration sets saved on the floppy disk to the AT-80SL/ 60SL

Insert the floppy disk containing the saved Registration sets into the disk drive, and read the Registration sets into the AT-80SL/60SL.

Switch the Registration sets as you perform

Press the Registration buttons to switch Registrations as you play the song. To call up the next Registration Set, press the [Load Next] button, then press the Registration buttons.

Storing Registrations

1. Make all the panel settings that you wish to store.
2. While holding down the [Write] button, press one of the Registration buttons [1]-[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]-[8]).

The panel settings will be stored in the selected Registration button.

You can also assign the "Right + Load Next" to the foot switch and use it to call up subsequent Registration sets (p. 119).

For details on the settings that are stored in a Registration, refer to "Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off" (p. 255).

Recalling a Registration

Settings that have been registered to Registration buttons [1]-[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]-[8]) can be recalled in two ways: "INSTANT" and "DELAYED."

At the factory this is set to "DELAYED."

How to Recall a Registration (DELAYED)

Recalling voices and other panel settings

1. Press and immediately release one of the Registration buttons [1]-[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]-[8]).

Recalling settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment in addition to the panel settings

1. Press and hold a Registration button [1]-[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]-[8]) for several seconds.

The indicator of the rhythm select button will blink, and the panel settings and settings related to rhythm performance and automatic accompaniment will be recalled.

How to Recall a Registration (INSTANT)

Recalling panel settings of a voice, or when recalling settings for rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment in addition to panel settings

1. Press and immediately release one of the Registration buttons [1]-[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]-[8]).

When changing the way Registrations are called up, refer to "Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations" (p. 92).

Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations

Settings for Rhythm play and Automatic Accompaniment are recalled when you continue holding a Registration button [1]–[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]–[8]) for several seconds, but you can change this so that the settings are recalled the instant you press the button.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The sub-window appears.

2. Touch.

The Registration Load screen appears.

3. Touch .

The Utility screen appears.

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button on the panel.

4. Touch .

The Registration Options screen appears.

5. Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will alternate between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

Setting	Descriptions
DELAYED	When you press and hold a Registration button for several seconds, the settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled in addition to the panel settings. If you press and immediately release a Registration button, only the settings that are not related to Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled.
INSTANT	Settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled the instant that you press a Registration button [1]-[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]-[8]).

6. Touch.

Automatically Registering When You Switch Panel Settings

When the [Manual] button is ON (lit), all panel settings you make will be stored automatically in the [Manual] button as they are made, thus updating the Registration that had been previously saved.

You can change the timing of recalling the transpose setting when you press a Registration button. For details refer to "Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled" (p. 190).

NOTE

The settings stored in the [Manual] button will return to their default values when the power is turned off.

Assigning a Name to a Registration Set

When saving Registration sets, names like "REGIST-01-99" will be assigned by default, but you can assign a name that will help you later to identify the contents of the Registration set.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The sub-window appears.

2. Touch.

The Registration Save screen appears.

3. Touch to open the Utility screen.

The Utility screen appears.

MEMO

When you touch , the instrument jumps to the Registration Load screen.

4. Touch .

The Rename screen appears.

5. Touch < / abc / 1% > to change among uppercase/ lowercase/symbols.

Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available choice, like this: uppercase lowercase symbols uppercase ....

6. Touch the screen to specify the desired character.

The following characters can be selected.

Uppercase	A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Lowercase	a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Symbols	!“# % &’( )*+, -. / :=?^_0123456789
Del	Delete a character.
Space	Insert a space.
← →	Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel> .

7. When you're done making the settings, touch .

The Registration set in the AT-80SL/60SL's internal memory has now been named.

The Rename screen can also be opened in the following ways.

Main screen
→ →
Registration Load screen
→ Utility screen

Formatting Disks

Before any floppy disk (new or used) can be used with the AT-80SL/60SL it must first be formatted (prepared).

Formatting a floppy disk erases all information stored on the disk, and puts it in a format that is acceptable for the device in which it will be used. If a floppy disk is in a format that doesn't match the format of this unit, you won't be able to use that floppy disk.

1. Make sure that the write protect tab of the floppy disk is in the "Write" (permit) position.

1. With the label of the floppy disk facing upward, insert it into the disk drive until it clicks into position.

The disk drive is located to the upper right of the AT-80SL/60SL's keyboard.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The sub-window appears.

NOTE

Formatting a disk destroys all data previously stored on the disk. If you're formatting a used floppy disk for reuse, be sure to check first to make sure the disk doesn't contain any data you don't want to lose.

4. Touch.

The Registration Save screen appears.

5. Touch .

The Utility screen appears.

6. Touch .

The Format Disk screen appears.

If you touch , you will return to the Registration Save screen without formatting.

7. Touch to start formatting.

While formatting is in progress, the following display appears.

When the format is finished, the Registration Save screen returns.

NOTE

Never attempt to remove the floppy disk until formatting is complete.

Saving Registration Sets to a Floppy Disk

With the settings of Registration buttons [1]–[12] (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]–[8]) considered as one set, a single floppy disk can store up to 99 sets of data. We recommend that complex panel settings or Registrations you wish to keep be saved on disk. Furthermore, when you save registrations created on the AT-80SL/60SL to floppy disks, you can call up their settings on other Atelier Series instruments and use the registrations the same way.

1. Make sure that the disk drive contains a disk that was formatted (p. 96) by the AT-80SL/60SL.
2. Touch on the Main screen. The sub-window appears.

1. Touch.

The Registration Save screen appears.

MEMO

When you touch , the instrument jumps to the Registration Load screen.

MEMO

If you wish to assign a name before you save, refer to "Assigning a Name to a Registration Set" (p. 94).

4. Touch <>> <> in the screen to select the save-destination number.

Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as "---".

To cancel the Save operation, touch the button to close the Registration Save screen.

5. Touch.

The Save Format screen appears.

6. Touch or .

Settings	Description
Original	Save formats that can be used with the AT-SL Series When saved in this format, the data can also be used by AT-45, AT-15 and AT-S Series devices.
R-Series	Save formats that can be used with AT-R Series devices

7. Touch.

Saving of the registration data will begin.

When saving ends, the "----" in the screen will change to the registration name that you saved.

If you have assigned a name, the Registration set will be saved to floppy disk with that name.

If the following screen appears

If you select a number at which a registration has already been saved and touch , the following screen appears.

If you wish to update the contents of the Registration data

1. Touch .

If you wish to save new data instead of updating the registration

1. Touch.

Rewriting of the Registration will be canceled.

1. In the Registration Save screen, select the number that is displayed as "-----" (a number that currently does not contain registration data).
2. Save the Registration (p. 98).

When saving is complete, the saved registration name will be displayed.

Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the AT-80SL/60SL

Here's how to recall a previously saved Registration set from the floppy disk into the memory of the AT-80SL/60SL. Registrations can be selected in the following three ways.

Loading a Set of Registrations (Load) p. 101

You can load a "set" (a collection of settings for Registration buttons [1]–[12] on the AT-80SL, Registration buttons [1]–[8] on the AT-60SL) from floppy disk.

Loading an Individual Registration (Load One) p. 103

Recall the settings of one of the Registration [1]–[12] buttons (on the AT-60SL, Registration buttons [1]–[8]).

Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved on the Floppy Disk (Load Next) p. 106

Press the [Load Next] button to recall registration sets in the order in which they are saved on the floppy disk.

Loading a Set of Registrations

1. Insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the disk drive.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The sub-window appears.

NOTE

Be aware that when you load Registrations from a disk, the Registrations that were previously in internal memory will be lost. It is a good idea to save important Registrations to floppy disk (p. 98).

MEMO

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button, instead of performing steps 2 and 3.

3. Touch.

The Registration Load screen appears.

4. In the screen, touch <> <> to select the Registration that you wish to load into internal memory.

To cancel operation, touch.

5. Touch.

The registration data will start being read.

When the Registration has been loaded, the Registration Load screen will reappear.

When you use the Registrations saved on the AT-90/AT-80/AT-30, refer to "Using Registrations Created on an Earlier Model" (p. 111)

When you touch , the instrument jumps to the Registration Save screen.

Loading an Individual Registration

1. Insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the disk drive.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The sub-window appears.

1. Touch.

The Registration Load screen appears.

1. In the screen, touch <> <> to select the registration that you wish to load into internal memory.
2. Touch to open the Utility screen.

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button, instead of performing steps 2 and 3.

6. Touch .

The Load One Registration screen appears.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

7. In the screen, touch Disk < 1> - < 12> (on the AT-60SL, Disk < 1> - < 8 > ) to select the number of the registration button that you wish to load from disk into internal memory.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

8. In the screen, touch Internal <1> - <12> (on the AT-60SL, Internal <1> - <8> ) to select the number of the storage-destination button.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

To cancel this operation, touch <Cancel> .

9. When you're done making the settings, touch .

The following display appears.

Executing...

When the Registration has been loaded, the basic screen will reappear.

Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved on the Floppy Disk (Load Next)

On the AT-80SL/60SL, you can simply press the [Load Next] button to successively recall registrations in the order in which they were saved on the floppy disk. This function is called "Load Next."

When you will be performing live, you can save registration sets to floppy disk in the order in which you will be performing. Then while you perform, you can recall the next registration set easily and smoothly.

1. Insert the floppy disk on which the registrations are saved into the floppy disk drive.

2. Press the [Load Next] button.

The first registration saved on the floppy disk will be recalled into the AT80SL/60SL.

The following screen appears.

3. Press one of the registration [1]–[12] buttons (on the AT-60SL, registration [1]–[8] buttons).

The registration will be loaded (recalled into internal memory).

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to successively recall the registration sets.

By using the "Disk Edit" function, you can modify the order or the name of the registrations saved on disk, or delete an unwanted registration (p. 94, p. 108, p. 110).

Button	Description
Undo	Return to the registration that had been selected before you pressed the [Load Next] button.
OK	Finalize the registration. It will not be possible to return to the previous registration.

Instead of performing step 3, you can also load the registration by touching in the screen.

Checking the next registration set

1. Access the Main screen.

1. Touch the <> icon several times to switch to <> .

The Main screen display will switch to the registration.

If the next registration set is loaded

"Next" will indicate the name of the next registration set.

Deleting a Set of Registrations from a Floppy Disk

Here's how to delete a Registration set that was saved to a floppy disk.

1. Insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the disk drive.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The sub-window appears.

1. Touch .

The Registration Disk Edit screen appears.

Button	Meaning	Description
Rename	Modify the name	The Rename screen appears. You can touch the screen and rename the selected registration (p. 94).
Up	Change the order (upward)	The selected registration will be moved earlier in the order (p. 110).
Down	Change the order (downward)	The selected registration will be moved later in the order (p. 110).
Delete	Delete the Registration	The selected registration will be deleted.

1. In the screen, touch <>> <> to select the registration that you wish to delete.
2. Touch.

The following display appears.

To cancel operation, touch .

1. If you are sure that you wish to delete the registration, touch OK>.

When the Registration has been deleted, the Registration Disk Edit screen will reappear.

When a registration is deleted, the deleted registration name will change to

Changing the Order of Registration on Floppy Disk

After saving registrations on floppy disk, you can change the order or name of the registrations (p. 94), or delete a registration (p. 108). This is very convenient when you are preparing to use the [Load Next] button (Load Next function p. 106) to recall successive registrations while you play.

1. Insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the disk drive.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The sub-window appears.

1. Touch .

The Registration Disk Edit screen appears.

1. Touch <>><> in the screen to select a registration.
2. Touch <Up> or <Down> to move the registration.

Button	Mean	Description
Rename	Modify the name	The Rename screen appears. You can touch the screen and rename the selected registration (p. 94).
Up	Change the order (upward)	The selected registration will be moved earlier in the order.
Down	Change the order (downward)	The selected registration will be moved later in the order.
Delete	Delete the Registration	The selected registration will be deleted (p. 108).

1. Touch.

Using Registrations Created on an Earlier Model

Registrations that were created on the ATELIER series (AT-90/80/30) or ATELIER-R series (AT-90R/80R/60R/30R/20R) can be used on the AT-80SL/60SL.

When using a set of registrations that was created on the AT-90/80/60 models, your registrations will be converted to work in the AT-80SL/60SL models and loaded into internal memory. When loading these registrations the music style that was originally used can also be loaded into the [Disk/ User] button to complete the accurate reproduction of the original registration.

Recalling a registration that was created on the "AT-90/80/30"

1. Insert the floppy disk that contains Registrations created on an earlier model of the ATELIER series.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The sub-window appears.

1. Touch.

The Registration Load screen appears.

This operation is not necessary when recalling a registration that was created on a model in the AT-R series.

You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the [Registration] button, without performing steps 2 and 3.

1. Touch <><> to select the registration that you wish to load into internal memory.

To cancel operation, touch.

1. Touch.

The following screen appears.

To cancel operation, touch .

1. Touch the screen to select the model on which the Registration was created.
2. Touch to confirm the model on which the Registration was created.

If the Rhythm used by the Registration is found in the internal memory of the AT-80SL/60SL, the Registration will be loaded into internal memory. When loading is complete, the Registration Load screen will reappear.

NOTE

If the Rhythm of the [Disk/ User] button has been rewritten, there may be cases in which the Registration cannot be loaded correctly.

If internal memory does not contain a rhythm specified by the registration

The number of the included music style disk that contains that rhythm will be displayed.

AT-80SL

AT-60SL

8. Make a note of the number of the music style disk, and touch .

A similar rhythm that does exist in internal memory will be substituted for the rhythm that does not exist, and the registration will be loaded.

Loading a AT-90/80/30 rhythm into the [Disk/User] button

If you wish to use a Rhythm used by an earlier model of the ATELIER series with a Registration that you loaded, load the Rhythm from the Music Style disk into the [Disk/User] button.

9. Remove the Registrations floppy disk from the disk drive, and insert the Music Style disk.

10. Load the Rhythm whose number you noted in step 8 into the [Disk/User] button (p. 78).

Chapter 4 Using the Performance Functions

Transposing to a Different Key (Key Transpose)

You can transpose the key of a performance without having to shift the position of your fingers on the keyboard. This feature is called "Key Transpose."

For example: you may play in the familiar C major scale while your music will sound in any key of your choice.

Transpose

1. Set the value for the transposition with the Transpose [-] and [+] buttons.

Each time you press a Transpose [-][+] button, the pitch will be transposed by a semitone.

Acceptable values range from A , to G (in semitone steps).

The specified value will be displayed in the Main screen.

State of the Transpose [-] [+] buttons

If transposed (non-C)	One of the Transpose [-] [+] button indicators is lit.
If not transposed (C)	The Transpose [-] [+] button indicators are extinguished.

2. By pressing the Transpose [-] [+] buttons simultaneously, you can restore the default setting C.

The transposition setting is stored in the Registration. For details on the settings that are stored in the Registration, refer to "Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off" (p. 255).

You can change the timing at which the transposition settings saved in a Registration will be recalled. For details refer to "Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled" (p. 190).

Adjusting the Brightness of the Sound

Using the Brilliance slider, you can adjust the brightness of the sound.

1. For a brighter sound, push the slider away from you. For a mellower sound, pull the slider toward you.

Brilliance

You can adjust not only the treble range but the bass as well with the [Brilliance] slider. You can suppress the lower frequencies by moving the slider downwards.

Adding Decay to the Sound (Damper Pedal)

When you depress the Damper (Sustain) pedal, a decay effect will be added to the voices.

While you continue depressing the damper pedal, notes will be sustained even if you release the keys.

By default the decay effect will be applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard.

NOTE

This setting is not stored in the Registration.

MEMO

You can modify the setting so that decay is only applied to notes played on the Upper keyboard (p. 187).

NOTE

Decay cannot be added to the Solo voices.

MEMO

Decay can be applied to Pedal Bass voices played on the Lower keyboard (when the Pedal [To Lower] or [Bass Split] button indicators are lit). In this case, a decay will not be applied to the pedal bass voice.

Pitch Bend and Vibrato Effects

When you move the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever to the left or right, you can obtain a smooth change in the pitch of the notes being played (Pitch Bend effect). Move the lever to the right to raise the pitch, and to the left to lower it. Also, when you push the lever away from you, a vibrato effect can be obtained.

By default (immediately after the power is turned on) the Pitch Bend effect is added to the voices of all the sections being played on the Upper keyboard.

You can also adjust the range of the pitch which is shifted by the Pitch Bend lever. For details, refer to "Changing the Pitch Bend Range" (p. 188).

Please note that only the appropriate voices will allow vibrato to be added (p. 220).

You can change the settings so that both the Pitch Bend and Vibrato effects are applied to the Lower keyboard voice or the voices on the Pedalboard. Please refer to "Selecting the Range of Keys to Which the Pitch Bend/ Vibrato Lever will Apply" (p. 187).

Using the Foot Switches

On either side of the expression pedal are two Foot Switches. Different functions are assigned to each of these two foot switches.

You can also change the functions assigned to the left and right Foot Switches. Please refer to “Changing the Function of the Foot Switch” (p. 118).

With the factory settings, the following functions are assigned to the left and right Foot Switches.

Right Foot Switch	Switch the Rotary effect between Fast/Slow. If Rotary is turned on, the Rotary effect will switch between “Fast” and “Slow” each time you press the Foot Switch.
Left Foot Switch	Glide (an effect by which the pitch is lowered by a semitone while the foot switch is pressed, and is returned to what is originally was when you release your foot). While you are pressing the Foot Switch, the pitch will be temporarily lowered. When you release the Foot Switch, the pitch will return to normal gradually.

You can store functions to be assigned to the foot switch to individual Registration buttons (p. 90).

NOTE

If "Regist Shift" is turned "RIGHT," "LEFT," or "RIGHT + Load Next," the foot switch will function only to switch registrations (p. 119).

MEMO

The Glide effect will only be applied to the keyboard section that has been specified as being the destination for the Pitch bend/Vibrato lever. Please refer to "Selecting the Range of Keys to Which the Pitch Bend/Vibrato Lever will Apply" (p. 187).

Changing the Function of the Foot Switch

You can select any of the following functions and assign them to either Foot Switch on the right or left side of the Expression Pedal.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch.

The Controller screen appears.

1. Touch <><> to display the L Foot Switch or R Foot Switch.

1. Touch <L Foot Switch> or <R Foot Switch> setting.

1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.
2. Touch.

Available functions	Description
ROTARY FAST/SLOW	Switch the Rotary speed between "FAST" and "SLOW."
GLIDE	While the Foot Switch is pressed, the pitch will temporarily be lowered, and will gradually return to normal when you release the Foot Switch. When the power is turned on, Glide effect is added to the voice of all the sections being played on Upper keyboard.
LEADING BASS	The Leading Bass function (p.72) will operate only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.
RHYTHM START/STP	Start/Stop the Rhythm.
COMP PLAY/STOP	The same function as theComposer [Play/Stop] button. Each time you press the Foot Switch, the performance data will play back or stop.
INTRO/ENDING	Play an Intro or Ending.
FILL IN TO VAR	After inserting a Fill-In, playback will switch to the variation pattern.
FILL IN TO ORIG	After inserting a Fill-In, playback will switch to the original pattern.
ORCHESTRATOR	Switch the Style Orchestrator button.If the Style Orchestrator [Basic] button or [Advanced2] button is selected, the [Basic] and [Advanced2] buttons will be switched.If the [Advanced1] button or [Full] button is selected, the [Advanced1] button and [Full] button will be switched.
BREAK	Stop the rhythm at the end of that measure.
DAMPER OF UPPER	Notes played on the Upper keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.
DAMPER OF LOWER	Notes played on the Lower keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch.

NOTE

If the "Regist Shift (Registration Shift)" setting (p. 119) is "RIGHT," "LEFT," or "RIGHT + Load next," the Foot Switch will be dedicated to switching through the Registrations, and the "R Foot Switch" or "L Foot Switch" setting will be ignored (p. 119).

Using the Foot Switch to Switch Registrations

You can use the Foot Switch as a dedicated switch for selecting Registrations in order.

NOTE

The Regist Shift settings are stored to each individual Registration Set. When "RIGHT + Load Next" is assigned to the foot switch and the Load Next function is used to switch Registration Sets saved to a floppy disk, set the Regist Shift setting to "RIGHT + Load Next" for all saved Registrations.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch .

The Controller screen appears.

3. Touch <>> <> to display the Regist Shift.

4. Touch the Regist Shift setting.

5. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

6. Touch.

This setting remains stored in memory even while the power is turned off.

Setting	Descriptions
OFF	You can use a function assigned to the foot switch.
RIGHT	The right foot switch is dedicated to switching registrations. The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used.
LEFT	The left foot switch is dedicated to switching registrations. The function assigned to the left foot switch cannot be used.

Setting

Descriptions

RIGHT + Load Next

The right foot switch is dedicated to switching registrations. The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used. Selecting the Registration [12] button (on the AT-60SL, registration [8] button) and pressing the right foot switch activates the Load Next function, calling up the next registration saved to the disk. The Registration Load window appears in the display. When you then press the right foot switch again, the Registration Set is confirmed, and the Registration [1] button is selected. Example: 1→2→3...→12 (8, on the AT-60SL)→ Load Next→(Next Registration) 1

What is "Load Next"?

You can use the Load Next function to call up Registrations in the order saved to the floppy disk.

When you will be performing live, you can save registration sets to floppy disk in the order in which you will be performing. Then while you perform, you can recall the next registration set easily and smoothly.

Checking the next registration set

1. Display the Main screen (p. 26).
2. Touch the <> icon several times to switch to <.> .

The Main screen display will switch to the registration.

"Next" will indicate the name of the next registration set.

Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal

You can use the expression pedal to adjust the overall volume. When you depress the Expression Pedal, the volume increases. The volume decreases as you tilt the pedal back.

Decrease the volume

Increase the volume

Using the expression pedal enables you to give your performances even richer musical expressiveness.

The expression pedal features the following special characteristics:

• Completely releasing the expression pedal does not lower the volume to zero. If you do want to turn down the volume completely, set the [Master Volume] slider to the Min (Minimum) position.
• Even as you release your foot from the expression pedal and lower the volume, the lower-range portion will linger on. This provides a natural-sounding resonance.
• When an Active Expression voice is selected, the expression pedal can be used to produce changes in the voice (p. 49).

You can specify how the Expression Pedal will affect the sound when it is pressed (p. 121).

You can also specify whether the Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the recording of your performance (p. 186).

Likewise you can specify whether the Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the playback of recorded performance (p. 187).

Adjusting the Depth of the Expression Pedal

You can set the amount of effect applied when you step on the expression pedal.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .
   The Controller screen appears.
2. Touch <> to display the Exp. Curve (Expression Curve).
3. Touch setting.

1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

Setting	Descriptions
1	The position of the expression pedal does not really affect the rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment. This setting is convenient when you do not want to have the rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment volume change much.
2	The expression pedal is applied to the rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just as it is to the keyboard performance. The volume is easily adjusted according to the angle of the expression pedal, making this setting perfect for use in songs with big changes in dynamics.
3	The expression pedal is applied to the rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just as it is to the keyboard performance. The expression affect is applied more gently than with Setting 2, so this setting is appropriate for quieter songs with less intense dynamic changes.
4	The expression pedal does not affect the rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment at all. This setting is suitable for ensemble performances and other performances featuring multiple instruments.

1. Touch.

This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

Chapter 5 Applying Various Effects to the Sound

The AT-80SL/60SL allows you to apply various effects to the sounds you play from the keyboard.

Adding Harmony to a Melody (Harmony Intelligence)

Harmony appropriate for the chord you play in the lower keyboard can be added to the highest note played in the upper keyboard. This function is called "Harmony Intelligence."

When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] buttons, the voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically.

1. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button, getting its indicator to light up.

Each time you press the button, the indicator will alternate between ON (lit) and OFF.

The Harmony Intelligence screen appears for several seconds.

Changing the Type of Harmony Intelligence

There are 18 different Harmony types (AT-80SL).

There are 12 different Harmony types (AT-60SL).

When you press the [Harmony Intelligence] button to turn it on (lit), a voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically. The manner in which notes will sound also depends on the Harmony type.

1. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button, getting its indicator to light up.

The Harmony Intelligence screen appears for several seconds.

AT-80SL
AT-60SL

2. Touch <> <> to switch screens, and touch the screen to select the desired harmony intelligence.

The [Harmony Intelligence] button's indicator will blink.

Model	Harmony Intelligence Type
AT-80SL	ORGAN, BIG BAND, STRINGS, BLOCK, HYMN, TRADITIONAL, HARP, DUET, COMBO, JAZZ SCAT, COUNTRY, BROADWAY, OCTAVE 1, OCTAVE 2, 1 NOTE, 2 NOTES, 3 NOTES, 4 NOTES
AT-60SL	ORGAN, BIG BAND, STRINGS, BLOCK, HYMN, TRADITIONAL, HARP, COMBO, JAZZ SCAT, BROADWAY, OCTAVE 1, OCTAVE 2

3. Press the [Harmony Intelligence] button once again.

The [Harmony Intelligence] button indicator will light, indicating that the selected harmony intelligence has been confirmed.

The way in which the keys you press are sounded by each type of harmony intelligence is described below.

Type	Solo Voice	Upper Voice	Number of notes of the harmony
ORGAN	—	Theater Or.3	3
BIG BAND	Trumpet	Flugel Horn	4
STRINGS	Strings 1	Strings 1	4
BLOCK	Vibraphone	Piano 1	5
HYMN	Choir	Choir	4
TRADITIONAL	Currently Selected Tone		3
HARP	—	Harp	2
DUET	Trumpet	Tp. Section	1
COMBO	Clarinet	Trombone	2
JAZZ SCAT	Jazz Scat	Jazz Scat	3
COUNTRY	Full Organ1	Jazz Guitar	3
BROADWAY	Celesta	Theater Or.1	3
OCTAVE 1	Currently Selected Tone		2
OCTAVE 2	Currently Selected Tone		2
1 NOTE	Currently Selected Tone		2
2 NOTES	Currently Selected Tone		3
3 NOTES	Currently Selected Tone		4
4 NOTES	Currently Selected Tone		5

You can also confirm the Harmony Intelligence settings by touching on the Harmony Intelligence screen. You can also play the upper manual to confirm the type of the Harmony Intelligence.

Harp-type harmony intelligence does not sound the keys you play. Use your left hand to play a chord in the lower keyboard and use your right hand to play a glissando in the upper keyboard, and a beautiful harp glissando will be produced.

The number of notes of the harmony will depend on the Harmony Intelligence type.

Adding Modulation to the Sound (Rotary Effect)

Rotary is an effect which simulates the sound of rotating speakers. There is a choice of two settings: Fast and Slow.

Rotary Sound

1. Select the voice to which you wish to apply the Rotary effect.
2. Press the Rotary Sound [On/Off] button (confirm that its indicator is lit).

The Rotary effect will be applied to the voice.

1. Press the Rotary Sound [Fast/Slow] button to switch between Rotary Fast (LED lit) and Rotary Slow (LED turned off).

Rotary [Fast/Slow] button	Effect
LED lit (Fast)	The effect obtained is equivalent to speakers being rapidly rotated.
LED turned off (Slow)	Effect simulating the slow rotation of speakers.

When you switch the rotary effect from "Fast" to "Slow," the modulation will slow down gradually, and when you switch from "Slow" to "Fast" the modulation will speed up gradually.

NOTE

For more on the tones to which the Rotary effect can be applied, refer to Voice List (AT-80SL) (p. 220) and Voice List (AT-60SL) (p. 223).

MEMO

You can assign the Rotary Sound [Fast/Slow] button function to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 118).

Rotary Speed

You can make fine adjustments to the speaker rotation speed of the rotary effect (p. 124).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Effect screen appears.

1. Touch <><> to display the Rotary Speed.

2. Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary Speed to adjust the setting.

1. Touch <-> <+> to edit the value. Settings SLOW, NORMAL, FAST
2. Touch.

These settings remain stored in memory even while the power is off.

Rotary Color

This setting allows you to choose the brightness of the Rotary sound obtained when using the Rotary effect (p. 124).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Effect screen appears.

1. Touch <> <> to display the Rotary Color.

2. Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary Color to adjust the setting.

Each time you touch the Rotary Color setting, it will switch between "BRIGHT" and "MELLOW."

Settings BRIGHT, MELLOW

1. Touch.

These settings remain stored in memory even while the power is off.

Chorus Effect

Chorus is an effect that adds expansiveness to a sound, making one instrument sound like several.

You can apply a chorus effect for the "Upper Symphonic," "Upper Orchestral," "Lower Symphonic," and "Lower Orchestral" voices.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

2. Touch either <UPPER> or <LOWER> .

Menu	Description
UPPER	To apply chorus to the Upper part
LOWER	To apply chorus to the Lower part

For some of the voices, Chorus may already be turned ON.

1. For the part to which you wish to apply the chorus effect, touch the Chorus "ON/OFF" display to change the setting. Each time you touch the Chorus setting, it will alternate ON/OFF.

Indication	Description
ON	The Chorus effect will be applied to the voice.
OFF	The Chorus effect will not be applied to the voice.

1. Touch.

Sustain Effect

Sustain allows you to add a sustain effect or decay to each voice after the keys are released.

The Sustain effect can be added to the Upper (except the Solo part), Lower, and Pedal voices.

AT-80SL

Sustain

AT-60SL

Sustain

1. Press the Sustain [Pedal] [Lower] [Upper] button for the keyboard to which you wish to apply Sustain (indicator lights).

The Sustain effect can be applied simultaneously to the voices of the Upper part (except the Solo part), Lower part, and Pedal Bass part.

NOTE

Some voices do not allow the Chorus effect to be applied. For details refer to "Voice List" (p. 220).

MEMO

You can open the Lower Keyboard screen or Upper Keyboard screen with touching <Lower> , and <Upper> .

NOTE

The Sustain effect will not be applied to the Solo part voice.

MEMO

The length of Sustain can be modified independently for each keyboard (p. 129).

Changing the Sustain Length

The sustain length can be set independently (SHORT, MIDDLE (Medium) or LONG) for the Upper and Lower keyboards and Pedalboard. You can make a separate setting for each keyboard.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch either <UPPER> , <LOWER> , or <PEDAL> .

Menu	Part whose sustain length you wish to change
UPPER	To change the length of the Upper part.
LOWER	To change the length of the Lower part.
PEDAL	To change the length of the Pedal part.

1. Touch <><> to display the Sustain Length.

You can open the Pedalboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Upper Keyboard screen with touching , , and .

1. For the part whose sustain length you wish to adjust, touch the Sustain "SHORT/MIDDLE/ LONG" display.

1. Touch <><+ to change the value. Settings SHORT, MIDDLE, LONG
2. Touch.

Reverb Effect

Reverb is an effect that adds a sense of spaciousness to the sound, creating the illusion of playing in a large or small concert hall, a large or small room, a small club, etc.

AT-80SL

1. Press the Reverb [▲] or [▼] buttons to adjust the overall Reverb amount.

When you press the up button [] , additional Reverb is applied. Pressing the down button [] decreases the Reverb level. If none of the Reverb indicators are lit, the Reverb effect will not be heard.

When you press the Reverb [▲] [▼] buttons, the Part Balance Monitor screen appears. In the Part Balance Monitor screen you can check the reverb depth.

The Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several seconds and then closes automatically. If you touch , the screen continues to be displayed until you touch again.

You can change the type of reverb, the reverb depth for each part, and the wall type. For details refer to Changing the Reverb Type (p. 131), Changing the Depth of the Reverb (p. 133), and Changing the Wall Type (p. 132).

Changing the Reverb Type

By changing the reverberations of the notes, you can enjoy the atmosphere of performance in a wide variety of different locations. You can select from the following 11 types of Reverb.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Effect screen appears.

1. Touch <> <> to display the Reverb Type.

2. Touch the value setting buttons for Reverb Type to adjust the setting.

The following screen appears.

1. Touch <-> <+> to edit the setting.

Display	Description
ROOM 1	Simulates the reverb of a conference room
ROOM 2	Simulates the reverb of a performance lounge
ROOM 3	Simulates the reverb of a large, open room
HALL 1	Simulates the reverb of a large concert hall
HALL 2	Simulates the reverb of a small concert hall
SMALL CHURCH	The reverberation of a small church
LARGE CHURCH	The reverberation of a large church
CATHEDRAL	The reverberation of a cathedral
PLATE	Applies a bright, metallic reverb
DELAY	An echo-like sound repeated several times
PAN DELAY	Similarly to the above but where the sound is panned between the left and right speakers

NOTE

It is not possible to modify the delay time (delay interval) when "DELAY" or "PAN DELAY" is selected.

1. Touch.

Changing the Wall Type

By changing the type of reverb (p. 131) you can experience the feeling of performing in various different locations, and by changing the Wall Type (wall material) you can make further adjustments to the way in which reverberation occurs.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Effect screen appears.

1. Touch <> <> to display the Wall Type.

2. Touch the value setting buttons for Wall Type to adjust the setting.

The following screen appears.

1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

Display	Description
DRAPERY	Pleated curtain
CARPET	Carpet
ACOUSTIC TILE	Acoustical tile, sound-absorptive tile
WOOD	Wood
BRICK	Brick
PLASTER	Plaster
CONCRETE BLOCK	Concrete block
MARBLE	Marble

1. Touch.

Changing the Depth of the Reverb

The depth of the Reverb can be set (0-10).

To adjust the reverb depth for Upper/ Lower/Pedal/Solo

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch,, or .

The Upper Keyboard screen, Lower Keyboard screen, or Pedalboard screen will be displayed.

Upper

Lower

Pedal

1. Touch <><> to display the Reverb Depth
2. Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to adjust.

The following screen appears.

1. Touch <-> <+> to adjust the setting. Settings 0-10
2. Touch.

To adjust the reverb depth for something other than Upper/Lower/ Pedal/Solo

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Effect screen appears.

1. Touch <> to display the Rev Depth (Reverb Depth).

Part Accomp, Rhythm, Drums, M.Perc, A.Bass

1. Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to adjust.

The following screen appears.

1. Touch <-> <+> to adjust the setting.

Settings 0-10, AUTO (Accomp, Rhythm, A.Bass only)

For the three Parts of the Accomp, Rhythm and Accompaniment Bass, you have the option of selecting the "AUTO" setting. Parts for which "AUTO" is selected will be set to the Reverb Depth that is most suitable for the Rhythm currently selected.

1. Touch.

Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard

Since the lower keyboard of the AT-80SL/60SL provides a generous 76 notes, you can use it to play piano pieces with ease. In addition, you can divide the keyboard into two or more sections and play solo voices, play the pedal bass voice, or combine a variety of uses for even more versatility.

For example, the following applications are possible.

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Solo Voice

• Press the Solo [To Lower] button in the Solo section to Play the Solo voice to the Lower keyboard (p. 137).

Drums/SFX
■ Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Part by Hand

• Press the [Bass Split] button in the Pedal section to play the Pedal Bass voice from the Lower keyboard (p. 140).

Drums/SFX
■ Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds or Sound Effects

• Press the [Manual Perc] button to play drum sounds or sound effects with the Lower voice on the lower keyboard (p. 142).
  Drums/SFX
  Manual Perc.
  Bass
  Lower
  Solo

Chapter 6 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively

Playing Drum Sounds from the Entire Lower Keyboard

• Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 56).

Drums/SFX
Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play Drum Sounds and Solo Voice

• Press the [Drums/SFX] button (p. 56), and then press the Solo [To Lower] button (p. 137)

Drums/SFX
Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo

By changing the combination of voices that are played on the Lower keyboard, and by changing the Solo Split Point (p. 139) and Bass Split Point (p. 141), you can create the following types of setup.

Drums/SFX

Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo

Drums/SFX

■ Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo

Drums/SFX
Manual Perc.
Bass
Lower
Solo

Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard (Solo [To Lower] Button)

Normally, the solo voice will sound on the upper keyboard.

By using the Solo [To Lower] button, you can play the solo voice in the right-hand side of the lower keyboard that includes the B4 key. The state in which the keyboard is divided in this way is called "split," and the location at which the keyboard is divided to play the solo voice in the lower keyboard is called the "Solo Split Point."

1. Select a Solo voice (p. 44).
2. Press the Solo [To Lower] button (indicator lights).

When you play the Lower keyboard, the Solo voice will sound in the range to the right of the Solo Split Point.

1. To turn off the Solo split, press the Solo [To Lower] button (indicator turns off).

The Solo voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard; the Solo voice will now be played in the Upper keyboard.

The key used for the solo split point is included in the Solo voice range.

If the Solo [To Lower] is ON, the Solo voice will not be heard from the upper keyboard.

You can adjust the Solo Split Point (p. 139).

You can change how the Solo voice will sound (p. 138).

You can layer the Solo voice with the Lower voice so that they will sound together (p. 138).

Changing How the Solo Voice Responds

When the Solo voice is assigned to the Upper keyboard or the Lower keyboard, you can specify how the Solo voice will respond when more than one key is pressed.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch.

The Upper Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch <><> to display the Solo Mode.

1. Touch the Solo Mode setting (the TOP NOTE, LAST NOTE, or POLYPHONIC indication).

1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

Setting	Descriptions
TOP NOTE	The Solo voice will sound the highest note that is played for the Solo part.
LAST NOTE	he Solo voice will sound the note that was most recently played for the Solo part.
POLYPHONIC	The Solo voice will sound all notes that are played for the Solo part.

1. Touch.

Layering the Solo Voice and Lower Voice

When the Solo voice is being played by the Lower keyboard (i.e., when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON), you can specify whether the Lower voice and the Solo voice will sound together (layered), or will sound separately (split).

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch.

The Upper Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch <0><0 to display the Solo To Lower Mode.

1. Touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting to switch between "SPLIT" and "LAYER."

Each time you touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting, it will alternate between "SPLIT" and "LAYER."

Setting	Descriptions
SPLIT	The parts will sound separately.
LAYER	The Lower voice and Solo voice will sound together.

1. Touch.

Changing the Solo Split Point

This setting is used to determine the Solo Split Point (lower limit of the playable range of the Solo voice) on the Lower keyboard to any desired position.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Split Point screen appears.

1. Touch <1> <2> to change the Solo Split Point.

Settings E1 to G7

1. Touch.

You can also set the split point by pressing the key of the lower keyboard that you want to be the Solo Split Point.

1. While touching the Solo Split Point value (E1-G7 indication) in the Split Point screen, press the key in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as the Solo Split Point.

The Solo Split Point will be set in the Split Point screen.

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice ([Bass Split] Button)

By using the [Bass Split] button you can play the bass voice in the left-hand side (including C3) of the lower keyboard. The location at which the lower keyboard is divided in this way, to play the pedal bass voice, is called the "Bass Split Point."

1. Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 43).
2. Press the Pedal [Bass Split] button (indicator lights).

When you play the Lower keyboard, the Pedal Bass voice will sound in the range to the left of (and including) the C3 note.

1. To turn off the Bass split, press the Pedal [Bass Split] button (indicator turns off).

The Pedal Bass voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard; the Pedal Bass voice will now be played in the pedalboard.

The bass split point is included in the left-hand area of the keyboard.

If the Pedal [Bass Split] is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the pedalboard.

You can adjust the Bass Split Point (p. 141).

It is not possible to select and play both [Bass Split] and Pedal [To Lower] buttons simultaneously.

If the [Bass Split] is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard. The Pedal Bass voice will sound from the Lower keyboard.

Changing the Bass Split Point

You can assign the Bass Split Point (the highest key up to which the Pedal Bass voice will sound), to any key of the Lower keyboard.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Split Point screen appears.

1. Touch <4> <5> to modify the Bass Split Point.

Settings E1 to G7

1. Touch.

You can also set the bass split point by playing the desired key of the lower keyboard.

1. While touching the Bass Split Point value (E1-G7 indication) in the Split Point screen, press the key in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as the Bass Split Point.

The bass split point will be set in the Split Point screen.

Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice (Pedal [To Lower] Button)

By using the Pedal [To Lower] button, you can sound the Pedal Bass voice by playing the root note (see p. 249) of a chord on the Lower keyboard in the area that is playing the Lower voice.

1. Select a Pedal Bass voice (p. 43).
2. Press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator lights).

When you play a chord in the area of the Lower keyboard that sounds the Lower voice, the Pedal Bass voice will also be heard and will play the root note.

If the "Leading Bass" function is on (p. 72), the lowest note played in the lower keyboard will sound the pedal bass voice.

1. To turn off the Solo split, press the Pedal [To Lower] button (indicator turns off).

The Pedal Bass voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard.

NOTE

If no portion of the Lower keyboard is sounding the Lower voice (the [Drums/ SFX] button is ON), the Pedal Bass voice will not sound.

NOTE

It is not possible to select and play both [Bass Split] and Pedal [To Lower] buttons simultaneously.

NOTE

If the Pedal [To Lower] is ON, the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard.

Chapter 7 Recording/Playing Back What You Play

The internal composer can record performances and play back commercial SMF music files.

The composer can be used in the following two ways.

Using the PanelComposer Buttons

Button	Description
Reset	Returns you to the start of the song.
Play/Stop	Starts and stops playback of the song.
	After the [Rec] button has been pressed, putting the composer in record standby mode, recording then starts when the [Play/Stop] is pressed.
Rec	The unit switches to record standby mode. * In record standby, the [Rec] button is lit, and the [Play/Stop] button flashes.
Song	The Song Select screen appears in the display.
Registration	The Registration Load screen appears in the display.
Demo	When you press the [Demo] button while a floppy disk is in the disk drive, all of the songs on the floppy disk are played back one after another.
	(When no floppy disk is in the disk drive) The Demo screen opens.

Touching in the Main Screen to Open the Rec/Play Screen and Using the Rec/Play Screen'sComposer Buttons

Button	Description
TrackRhythmAccmpBassLowerUpperSoloControl	Buttons for tracks to which performances are recorded light up. A lighted button can be toggled between lighted and unlit by pressing it Tracks are muted when the button's light is off.For more about the track buttons, refer to p. 144.
Reset	Returns you to the beginning of the song.
Stop	Stops playback of the song.
Play	Starts playback of the song.
	After <Rec> has been touched to put the composer in record standby mode, recording then starts when you touch<Play>.
Rec	The unit switches to record standby mode.* In record standby, <Rec> is lit, and<Play> flashes.
Bwd	Rewinds the song.
Fwd	Fast forwards the song.
Track/	You can toggle between display of the track buttons, the bouncing ball, or the track mute buttons by touching the button.
ElbigScore/	The Notation screen appears in the display.
	The Utility screen for theComposer is displayed.

What is a Track Button?

The recorded performance will be automatically assigned to the seven Track buttons according to the recorded part. You can record or play back independently by specifying the desired Track button; for example, when you wish to re-record a track.

You can record different kinds of performance data into each track:

Track	Recorded performance
Rhythm	Rhythm performance
	Drums/SFX
	Manual percussion
Accmp	Automatic Accompaniment (except Bass)
Bass	Pedal Bass Voice Performance Data (Note, Bender, Modulation)
	Bass part of the Automatic Accompaniment,
Lower	Lower Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation)
Upper	Upper Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation, After Touch)
Solo	Solo Voice Performance Data (Note, Hold, Bender, Modulation, After Touch)
Control	Glide
	Expression
	Reverb Type
	Reverb Depth
	Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
	Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)
	Transpose [-] [+] button setting
	[Harmony Intelligence] button (ON/OFF)
	Harmony Intelligence Type
	Rotary [Fast/Slow] button (ON/OFF)
	Rotary [ON/OFF] button (ON/OFF)
	Pedal Bass Mode

Track	Recorded performance
Control	Solo Mode
	Solo To Lower Mode
	Solo Split Point
	[Bass Split] button (ON/OFF)
	Bass Split Point
	Sustain ON/OFF
	Sustain Length
	Initial Touch
	Wall Type
	The Voices assigned for each part
	Level [▲][▼] (Part Balance Volume)
	The Reverb depth for each part
	The Chorus settings (ON/OFF) of the voice
	The Octave settings for each part
	[Drums/SFX] button (ON/OFF)
	Drums/SFX Set
	[Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF)
	Manual Percussion Set
	Chord Intelligence
	Chord Hold
	Leading Bass
	Lower Voice [Hold] button (ON/OFF)
	Tempo setting
	Volume of the rhythm Accompaniment part
	Reverb depth of the rhythm Accompaniment part
	Volume of the rhythm drum part
	Reverb depth of the rhythm drum part
	Volume of the rhythm bass part
	Reverb depth of the rhythm bass part

MEMO

More information about the track assignments when playing commercial SMF music files, please refer to

"Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Commercial SMF Music Files" (p. 147).

During recording, the control track will store the operations as follows.

• Recording panel operations (Voice selections, Tempo changes, etc.)

Newly recorded performance data will be added without erasing the previously recorded data.

• Recording expression pedal operations

This will depend on the function of the expression pedal.

Recording of expression operations will differ depending on the setting for "Exp. Src (Rec)."

For details refer to "Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal" (p. 186).

If you wish to erase all the recorded data and record new performance data, use the editing function "Erase" (erase performance data) to erase the data (p. 168).

Displaying the Track Buttons

The track buttons will be displayed in the screen when you record or play back a performance.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

The following buttons are referred to as the track buttons.

All accompaniment data is grouped to the "Accmp" track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the rhythm performance data is grouped to "Rhythm."

If you want to mute only a portion of the rhythms or accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch off the Track Mute buttons there (p. 148).

Playing Back Performance Songs Stored on Floppy Disk and SMF Music Files

In addition to playing back the music you recorded on the instrument and saved to a floppy disk, AT-80SL/60SL also lets you enjoy a wide variety of commercially available song files, such as defined below.

SMF Music Files

The Standard MIDI File (SMF) format was designed to provide a means for exchanging performance data among a wide variety of devices. In addition to the song files described earlier, the AT-80SL/60SL is also capable of playing back any Standard MIDI File compatible with the General MIDI 2 or GS formats.

To play back only one song

1. Hold the floppy disk with the label facing upwards, and push it into the disk drive until it clicks into place.

The disk drive is on the right side of the unit, above the keyboard.

Never eject a disk while reading or writing is in progress, since that can damage the magnetic surface of the disk, rendering it unusable. (The disk drive's indicator will light up at full brightness when the drive is busy reading or writing data. Ordinarily, the indicator will be less brightly lit, or be extinguished.)

When the performance song loaded from a disk is a Standard MIDI File, "SMF" will be displayed on the Main screen.

1. Press the [Song] button.

The Song Select screen appears.

1. In the screen, touch <><> to select the song that you wish to play back.
2. Touch < 0 > to play back the song.
3. Touch < > to stop the song.

You can also play back or stop the music data by touching or in the Rec/Play screen. By touching or you can rewind or fast-forward the performance.

1. Press the Eject button.

The floppy disk is ejected a little out of the slot. Gently grasp the end of the floppy disk and pull it out.

Playing back all performance data

1. Hold the floppy disk with the label facing upwards, and push it into the disk drive until it clicks into place.

The disk drive is on the right side of the unit, above the keyboard.

1. Press the [Demo] button.

All performance data saved on the floppy disk will be played consecutively.

1. To stop playback, press the [Play/Stop] button.

Silencing a Specific Track (Track Mute)

When the Rec/Play screen is displayed, the track button will light to indicate a track in which a performance has been recorded. By turning off these track buttons, you can temporarily silence the sound. This is referred to as "Track Mute."

1. Press the [Song] button.

The Song Select screen appears.

1. In the screen, touch <><> to select the song that you wish to play back.
2. Touch to load the song.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

All accompaniment data is grouped to the "Accmp" track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the rhythm performance data is grouped to "Rhythm." If you want to mute only a portion of the rhythms or accompaniment, open up the Track Mute screen, and switch off the Track Mute buttons there (p. 148).

4. Press a track button that is lit, extinguishing the button.

When you play back the performance, track buttons that are not lighted will be muted (silenced).

5. Press the track button once again (button lights).

The part that had been muted will return to normal and will be heard.

Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Commercial SMF Music Files

Track button	Channel
Rhythm	10
Accmp	5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
Bass	2
Lower	3
Upper	4
Solo	1

Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Performance Data Created with an Music Atelier

Track button	Track Mute button
Rhythm	10, 11 (Drums/SFX), 13 (Manual Percussion)
Accmp	5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14, 15
Bass	2 (Bass)
Lower	3 (Lower)
Upper	4 (Upper)
Solo	1 (Solo)

Muting Individual Tracks of Performance Data

All accompaniment data is grouped to the "Accmp" track button in the Rec/Play screen. In the same manner, the rhythm performance data is grouped to "Rhythm." You can mute only a portion of the rhythms or accompaniment on the Track Mute screen.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < Track/ > a number of times.

The Track Mute screen appears.

Sixteen Track Mute buttons appear in the disp

From the left, these are "Track 1, Track 2 ... Track 15, and Track 16."

3. Touch the screen to select the track that you wish to mute.

The button you've touched goes out, indicating the sound is muted.

1. When you touch an unlit track button, the track button lights up, indicating muting of the track is cancelled.
2. Touch.

NOTE

Track mute will be defeated when you perform the following operations.

• Select different performance data.

The seven Track buttons in the Rec/Play screen (p. 147) correspond to the sixteen Track Mute buttons of the Track Mute screen as shown below.

Commercial SMF Music Files

Track Mute Button	Track Button
1 (Solo)	Solo
2 (Pedal)	Pedal
3 (Lower)	Lower
4 (Upper)	Upper
5-9, 11–16 (Acmp)	Accmp
10 (Rhythm)	Rhythm

Performance Data Created on the Atelier

Track Mute Button	Track Button
1 (Solo)	Solo
2 (Pedal)	Pedal
3 (Lower)	Lower
4 (Upper)	Upper
5-9, 12, 14, 15 (Acmp)	Accmp
10 (Rhythm)	Rhythm
11 (Drums/SFX)	Rhythm
13 (Manual Percussion)	Rhythm

• The Track Mute button 16 cannot be used with performance data created on an Atelier.

Viewing a Notation

You can display the notations of performances from music files and recordings made on the AT-80SL/60SL. This is very convenient when you want to read the music as you play and to confirm recorded songs.

Selecting Songs

There is no need to select the song when displaying notations for performances recorded with theComposer. Start from Step 5.

1. Take the floppy disk containing the song whose notations you want to display and insert it into the floppy disk drive.
2. Press the [Song] button.

The Song Select screen appears.

1. Touch <><> to select the song whose notation is to be displayed.
2. Touch.

After the song is loaded, the Rec/Play screen opens.

Displaying Notations

1. Touch on the Rec/Play screen.

The Notation screen appears.

Display	Explanation
	Enlarge the notation display.
Lyrics	Display lyrics in the notation.
Bass	Display the Bass part notation.
Lower	Display the Lower part notation.
Upper	Display the Upper part notation.
U&L	Display the Upper part and Lower part notations.
Option	You can change the part that is displayed, and change the way in which the notation is displayed (p. 150).

Touching the illustration of speaker on screen, you can mute the part. This is convenient for muting a specific part you want to practice. Touch the speaker icon once more to have the sound play again.

Changing the Notation Settings

1. Touch on the Main Screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Notation screen appears.

1. Touch.

The Notation Options screen appears.

1. Touch the button for the item whose setting you want to change.

Menu	Setting	Explanation
Pitch	C,D,E	Letter names (fixed do) are display in the detailed notation.
	Do,Re,Mi	Solumization syllables (movable do) are displayed in the detailed notation.
	OFF	Not displayed
Clef Upper	AUTO	Display is switched automatically.
	G Clef	Displayed the G-clef staff of the upper part.
	F Clef	Displayed the F-clef staff of the upper part.
Clef Lower	AUTO	Display is switched automatically.
	G Clef	Displayed the G-clef staff of the lower part.
	F Clef	Displayed the F-clef staff of the lower part.
Key	AUTO	Key is switched automatically.
	Db, Ab, Eb, Bb, F, C, G, D, A, E, B, F#, Bbm, Fm, Cm, Gm, Dm, Am, Em, Bm, F#m, C#m, G#, D#m	Display the notation in the selected key.
Upper Part	1-16	Select the part to be displayed as the upper part.
Lower Part	1-16	Select the part to be displayed as the lower part.
Bass Part	1-16	Select the part to be displayed as the bass part.

5. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

When you touch <Key> , the following screen appears.

The Key screen is composed of two screens. Touch

< Maj/Min > to switch between the two screens.

1. Touch.

Some notes on a Score screen

• When you start playback of music files, the marks _k=1^n appears. While this appears on the notation, the AT-80SL/60SL is reading data. Please wait until reading of the data is complete.
• In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.
• The notations that are presented by the display are produced based on the music files. Viewing ease is given priority over precise expression when dealing with complex, high-level music. Because of this, you may find that the notation shown in the display does not match what is provided on commercially available sheet music. The notation display feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation. In addition, the display cannot show notes that are briefer than a sixteenth note.
• If you select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will not be displayed in the notation. Use to change the part that is displayed.
• If you use the buttons located below the display to change the displayed part while the song is playing, the song may be played back from the beginning.

Recording a Performance

You can record the performance that you play. You can also record your performance while playing rhythms or automatic accompaniment.

1. Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.
2. Make sure that a floppy disk is not inserted in the disk drive.

If a floppy disk is in the disk drive, press the Eject button (p. 146) and remove the floppy disk.
3. Enter the recording standby mode by pressing the [Rec] button.
The [Rec] button indicator will light, and the [Play/Stop] button will blink.
4. Press the [Play/Stop] button to start recording.
When you press the [Play/Stop] button, the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.

If you wish to use Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment as you record, press the [Start/Stop] button instead of the [Play/Stop] button to begin recording. Also, if the [Sync Start] button is lit (i.e., if Sync Start is ON), recording will begin the instant you play the Lower keyboard.

1. Press the [Play/Stop] button when you have completed your recording.

The Track indicator where a performance song is recorded will change from a flashing to a constant light. When you press the [Intro/Ending] button (or [Start/Stop] button) while recording a Rhythm performance or Automatic Accompaniment, the Rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment will stop. However, the recording itself will continue. Press the [Play/Stop] button to stop recording.

The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 118).

You can also choose to cancel the metronome count-in before recording starts (p. 192).

Caution

If you press the [Rec] button when a song has been selected from the floppy disk, the selected song will be completely loaded into the AT-80SL/60SL and theComposer will enter into the recording standby mode. To record a new song, use the following procedure.

1. Press the [Rec] button to cancel recording standby.
2. Take the floppy disk out of the disk drive.
3. Delete the performance data (p. 156).
4. Press the [Rec] button.

The following screen appears

When the instrument's memory is nearing capacity.

When recording was automatically canceled because the memory limit was reached.

Playing Back a Performance Song

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch.

The location at which playback will start will return to the beginning of measure 1.

If you wish to begin playback from the middle of the song, touch <Bwd> <Fwd> to move to the measure from which you wish to begin playback.

3. Touch to begin playback.

After playback reaches the end of the performance, it will stop automatically.

You can also begin playback by pressing theComposer [Play/Stop] button.

1. To stop playback at any point, touch the button.

You can also stop playback by pressing theComposer[Play/ Stop] button.

The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal (p. 118).

You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will affect the playback and what you play while Atelier music file is being played back (p. 187).

If you load performance data (such as SMF music files) that was not designed for an ATELIER Series instrument and play it back, you may find, when playing rhythms and automatic accompaniment, that the music doesn't sound quite like it should. (For example, the wrong sounds could be played). If you want the data to be played back accurately, first press the [Reset] button prior to playback.

Add a Count Sound to Match the Timing (Count In Play)

In cases such as when you want to perform in time with a song, you can have a count sound played before playback of the song begins, allowing you to synchronize your own performance with the song.

Playing back a song after playing the count sound is called "Count In Play."

1. Hold down the [Reset] button and press the [Play/Stop] button.

The metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.

Recording Each Part Separately

In this method, each part (track button) is recorded one after another: first the Rhythm part, then the bass part, etc. If there are any previously recorded performances, you can listen to them as you record additional parts.

1. Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch the and buttons to select the desired measure (bar) when you start recording.

If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song, touch the button.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to enter recording-standby mode.

and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The track buttons that are already recorded will light.

Also, the panelComposer[Rec]buttonindicatorwill light,and [Play/Stop] button will blink.

You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the Composer [Rec] button.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to begin recording.

When you touch in the Rec/Play screen, the metronome will sound a two-measure count, and then recording will begin.

As you listen to the performance song previously recorded, record the Part into a new Track.

You can also start recording by pressing theComposer [Play/Stop] button.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Stop> to stop recording.

The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit.

You can also stop recording by pressing the Composer [Play/Stop] button.

Re-Recording

If you made a mistake in your performance during recording etc., you can re-record just a portion of the musical data in the track.

NOTE

If you wish to re-record with different settings for voices, tempo, part balance, erase the recorded song (p. 156) and re-record again. If the Control track still contains data from before you re-recorded, the volume or sounds may change during playback.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch the and buttons to select the desired measure (bar) when you start recording.

If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song, touch the button.

3. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to enter recording-standby mode.

and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light.

Also, the panelComposer[Rec]buttonindicatorwill light,and [Play/Stop] button will blink.

MEMO

You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the Composer [Rec] button.

4. Touch the Track button which you wish to rerecording (button flashes).

The song data of the specified Track (with the exception of the Control Track) will be erased as new song data is recorded.

MEMO

When the Track button is lit constantly, no song data has been recorded on that Track.

5. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to begin recording.

The metronome will sound a two-measure count, and then recording will begin.

MEMO

You can also start recording by pressing theComposer [Play/Stop] button.

6. In the Rec/Play screen, touch <Stop> to stop recording.

The buttons of tracks which were re-recorded will change from flashing to being constantly lit.

MEMO

You can also stop playback by pressing theComposer[Play/ Stop] button.

NOTE

If you wish to keep the existing Expression Pedal data, and record only the panel operations, you can make settings to prevent the operation of the Expression Pedal from being recorded (p. 186).

MEMO

You can use punch-in recording (p. 163) to re-record only the area that you specify.

Erasing a Performance Song (Song Clear)

If you wish to discard your recording and re-record from the beginning, or if you wish to record a new performance, you must erase the previously-recorded data.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < 0 (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch .

The following message, asking you to confirm your choice, will be displayed.

If you touch , the performance data will not be erased, and you will return to the Rec/Play screen.

4. If you touch <OK> , the performance data will be erased.

Changing the Name of a Performance Song (Rename)

A name is automatically assigned to a performance song that you record. However, at some point you may wish to change the name to something more meaningful.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

2. Touch < 0> (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

3. Touch .

The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.

4. Touch to open the Utility screen.

The Utility screen appears.

5. Touch .

The Rename screen appears.

You can also access the Rename screen as follows.

1. Touch <0 (Utility) on the Rec/Play screen.

The Utility screen appears.

1. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

1. Touch on the Edit Menu screen.

The Rename screen appears.

1. Touch the character select button (ABC/abc/10%) to switch among uppercase/lowercase/symbols.

Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase lowercase symbols uppercase...

7. Touch the screen to specify the desired character.

The following characters can be selected.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnpqrstuvwxyz
!“#%&'( )*+, -./:=?^_0123456789
Del	Deletes a character.
Space	Inserts a space (blank).
←→	Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

To cancel operation, touch .

8. When you're done making the settings, touch .

The new name is now inserted.

NOTE

You cannot directly change or edit the name of a performance song stored on a disk. The song must first be loaded (p. 159) into the instrument, edited, and then saved to disk again.

Saving Performance Songs Onto Floppy Disk

The performance data that you recorded will disappear when the power of the AT-80SL/60SL is turned off. If you wish to keep the performance data, you can save it on a floppy disk.

If the performance data has never been saved to a floppy disk, a "EDITED" symbol appears on the Main screen. When the performance data is saved to a floppy disk, this symbol will no longer be displayed.

1. Make sure that the disk drive contains a disk that was formatted by the AT-80SL/60SL.
2. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch < 0 (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.

1. Touch <> <> to select the number of the save destination.

Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as "----".

To cancel the Save operation, touch the to close the Song Save/Song Delete screen.

1. Touch .

The Save Format screen appears.

1. Touch the screen to select the format in which the data will be saved.

You can select either "ORIGINAL" or "SMF" format.

Display	Description
ORIGINAL	Save data in Atelier format
SMF	Saving in SMF Format for Atelier Sound Modules

1. Touch <OK> to finalize the save format.

Saving of the performance data will begin.

NOTE

Performance data saved by the Atelier cannot be played back properly by the sound generator of an instrument that is not a member of the Atelier series.

NOTE

Saving performance data in SMF format (SMF) requires a longer time than saving it in Atelier format (ORIGINAL).

If the following screen appears

If you select a number at which a performance data has already been saved and touch , the following screen appears.

If you wish to update the contents of the performance data

1. Touch .

If you wish to save the data without erasing the performance data already on disk you must rename the song

1. Touch to stop the Save operation.
2. In the Song Save/Song Delete screen, select the number that is displayed as "-----" (a number that currently does not contain performance data).
3. Save the performance data.

When saving is complete, the saved performance name will be displayed.

What is the SMF Format?

SMF (Standard MIDI File) is a data format that was created to provide music files compatibility between manufacturers.

Loading Performance Songs Into the AT-80SL/60SL

To edit (p. 165) or re-record a performance song that is stored on a floppy disk, you must first load that song into the instrument.

1. Insert the floppy disk containing the performance data into the disk drive.
2. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.
3. Touch < (Utility). The Utility screen appears.
4. Touch . The Song Select screen appears.

1. Touch <> to select the performance data that you wish to load into internal memory.
2. Touch.

The selected performance data will be loaded into internal memory.

If the following screen appears

The message below is shown when the performance song in the unit has not been saved to disk.

If you wish to erase the performance song

1. Touch the button.

If you wish to save the performance song on a floppy disk

1. Touch the button.

Save the song on a floppy disk (p. 158).

If loading is canceled because the memory limit has been reached, the following message will be displayed:

Deleting Performance Songs Stored on Disk

You can delete a performance song that was saved onto a floppy disk.

1. Insert the floppy disk containing the performance data into the disk drive.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch < 0> (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Song Save/Song Delete screen appears.

1. Touch <> to select the performance data that you wish to delete.
2. Touch.

The confirmation message appears.

If you touch the performance data will not be deleted.

1. When you touch <OK> the performance data will be deleted.

Layering a New Recording onto SMF Music Files

You can load commercially available SMF music files into the AT-80SL/60SL, and record your own performance on top of it. During recording, the data you've loaded will be played back, while you record your performance.

1. Insert a floppy disk containing commercially available SMF music files into the floppy disk drive.
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch < 日> (Utility). The Utility screen appears.
2. Touch . The Song Select screen appears.

1. Touch <>><> to select the performance data that you wish to load into internal memory.
2. Touch (load performance data).

The selected performance data will be loaded into internal memory.

For track assignments of SMF format performance data loaded to the AT-80SL/60SL, refer to p. 147.

1. Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance.
2. Touch the button and button to move to the measure at which you wish to begin recording.
3. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to enter recording-standby mode.

and unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink. The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light.

Also, the panelComposer[Rec]buttonindicatorwill light,and the [Play/Stop] button will blink.

You can also enter recording-standby mode by pressing the Composer [Rec] button.

1. Touch the Track button which you wish to recording (button flashes).
2. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to begin recording.

As you record, the music file that was loaded into the AT-80SL/60SL will play back.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch to stop recording.

The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit.

You can also start and stop recording by pressing theComposer [Play/Stop] button.

The performance data you recorded can be saved on a floppy disk (p. 158).

Commercially sold music files can also be loaded into the AT-80SL/60SL, but for reasons of copyright protection, cannot be saved in SMF format.

Using Song with a Different Tempo Than That of the Performance Song

1. Insert the floppy disk containing the performance song whose tempo you want to change into the disk drive.
2. Load the performance data into the unit (p. 159).
3. Determine the tempo with the Tempo [][] buttons.
4. Hold down the panel [Reset] button and press the [Rec] button.

NOTE

You cannot carry out this operation with the and in the Rec/Play screen.

Re-Recording Part of Your Performance (Punch-in Recording)

After you have recorded a performance, you can re-record a specified portion of the performance.

With this method, you listen to the recorded performance, and re-record just the desired area. This recording method is called "Punch-in Recording."

To Specify the Segment to be Recorded Over Again

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch < 0> (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Punch In/Out screen appears.

1. Touch the "From" value (the measure at which recording will begin).

1. Touch <-> <+> to specify "From" (the measure at which recording will begin).
2. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures that will be re-recorded).
3. Touch <-> <+> to set "For" (the number of measures that will be re-recorded).
4. Touch.

The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in recording standby.

To Record While Listening to the Song

1. Press the Track button which you wish to re-record (indicator flashes).
2. Touch to begin recording.

When you touch , the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins.

When you reach the first measure of the specified area, recording will begin. When the specified area ends, recording will end, and playback will resume.

While the song is playing back or recording, the Composer [Rec] button's indicator will be lit as follows.

While the performance is playing back	TheComposer [Rec] button's indicator will flash
While you are re-recording	TheComposer [Rec] button's indicator will light constantly

When recording has ended for the specified area and the data is once again playing back, the [Rec] button's indicator will resume flashing.

11. Touch <Stop> to stop the recording.

The indicator of the track button which recorded the performance will light.

Recording and Layering Drum Parts (Loop Recording)

You can repeatedly record over a specified region of the rhythm part, adding additional notes at each pass. This type of recording is called "Loop Recording."

This recording method is convenient when you wish to layer drum sounds individually for the Rhythm part.

NOTE

"Loop Recording" can be used only when recording the Rhythm part.

1. Press the [Drums/SFX] button or the [Manual Perc] button to select a Drum Set or Sound Effect Set (p. 56–p. 59).
2. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch the and on the Rec/Play screen, move to the measure where you wish to start Loop Recording.
2. Touch < 0> (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Loop Rec screen appears.

1. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures that will be recorded repeatedly).

To cancel operation, touch.

1. Touch <-> <+> to specify the "For" value (the number of measures that will be recorded repeatedly).
2. Touch.

The Rec/Play screen appears, and the unit is placed in recording standby.

1. Touch to begin recording.

When you touch the , the metronome will play two measures (bars) of count-in before recording begins. You can record repeatedly over the specified range of measures, adding additional notes at each pass.

1. Touch to stop playback.

The indicator of the Rhythm track button which recorded the performance will light.

Count-In Recording

This setting (ON/OFF) determines whether or not a metronome count-in (2 measures) will be heard after pressing the [Play/Stop] button on recording.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. Touch the Count-In Rec setting (ON/OFF) to switch it between "ON/OFF."

Each time you touch the Count-In Rec setting, it will alternate between ON/OFF.

Setting	Description
ON	A two-measure count will sound before recording
OFF	No count will sound before recording

1. Touch.

2. Touch < 0 (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch.

1. Touch <><> to display the Count-In Rec.

Chapter 8 Editing Your Musical Performance Data

Song files that you record can be edited using five different functions.

The following editing functions are provided.

Menu	Descriptions	Page
Delete Measure	Deleting a Specific Measure.	p. 165
Delete Track	Delete the Recording from a Track.	p. 166
Erase Event	Erase Recording.	p. 168
Copy	Copying Measures.	p. 170
Quantize	Correct Timing Inaccuracies.	p. 171
Rename	Change the name of the performance data.	p. 156

NOTE

Once you edit data, it cannot be restored to its original condition. As a precaution against accidents, we recommend that you save your song to a floppy disk before you edit it (p. 158).

Deleting a Specific Measure (Delete Measure)

You can delete a portion of the performance data. This function lets you delete specified measures (bars) of the song from all tracks. When any part of the song file is deleted, subsequent recording will be moved forward to fill the gap.

Example: To delete measures (bars) 5-8

1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10
1	2	3	4	5	6

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < 8> (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

3. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

4. Touch .

The Delete Measure screen appears.

1. Touch the "From" value (the first measure that you wish to delete).
2. Touch <-> <+> to set "From" (the first measure that you wish to delete).

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures that you wish to delete).
3. Touch <-> <+> to set "For" (the number of measures that you wish to delete).

To delete to the last measure, select "ALL."

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch .

The following display appears.

To cancel operation, touch <Cancel> .

1. Touch to delete the measures.

When deletion has been completed, you are returned to the Delete Measure screen.

Delete the Recording from a Track (Delete Track)

The AT-80SL/60SL has seven tracks. This function lets you delete the recording from a track that you specify.

For more on the content stored on each track, refer to p. 144.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < 0> (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

1. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

4. Touch .

The Delete Track (delete the performance data of a track) screen appears.

1. Touch the "Track" value (the track whose performance data you wish to delete).
2. Touch <>> <+> to select the "Track" (the track whose performance data you wish to delete).

Settings: RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .

2. Touch.

The following display appears.

To cancel operation, touch <Cancel> .

1. Touch <OK> to delete the performance data.

When the recording has been deleted, the Delete Track screen will reappear.

Erase Recording (Erase Event)

You can erase a specified portion of the performance in a specified area without making the song shorter. This is called the "Erase" function.

As an alternative to the method of erasing all performance data in a specified area, you can erase the following contents of the performance.

ALL	All recording
NOTE	Notes played on the keyboard
PANEL	Panel operations, Content Saved to the Control Track (Information Other than Expression, Voice, and Tempo Data) → Refer to p. 144.
EXPRESSION	Expression pedal recording
VOICE	Voice settings
TEMPO	Tempo setting

Example: Erasing measures (bars) 5-8

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < 8> (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

1. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

1. Touch .

The Erase Event screen appears.

1. Touch the "Event" value (the type of performance data that you wish to erase).

2. Touch <-> <+> to specify the "Event" (the type of performance data that you wish to erase).

Settings ALL, NOTE, PANEL, EXPRESSION, VOICE, TEMPO

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch the "Track" value (the track from which data will be erased).
3. Touch <-> <+> to specify the "Track" (the track from which data will be erased).

If you have selected EXPRESSION, VOICE and TEMPO as the type of recording to be erased, the Part selection will not be available because the expression control recording is common to all parts.

Settings ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL

If you select "ALL," the recording will be erased from all parts.

10.When you're done making the settings, touch .
11. Touch the "From" value (the measure at which erasure will begin).
12. Touch <-> <+> to set "From" (the measure at which erasure will begin).
13.When you're done making the settings, touch .
14. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures from which the data will be erased).
15. Touch <><+ to set "For" (the number of measures from which the data will be erased).

If you wish to erase to the last measure (bar), set "for: ALL."

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch .

The following display appears.

To cancel operation, touch .

1. Touch <OK> to erase the performance data.

Once the performance data has been erased, you are returned to the Erase Event screen.

Copying Measures (Copy)

This function lets you copy a portion of recorded song to a different measure (bar) location in the same track.

If a recording already exists at the copy destination, it will be erased.

Example: To copy measures (bars) 5-7 to measure (bar) 8

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < 0> (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

1. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

1. Touch.

The Copy screen appears.

1. Touch the "Track" value (the track to be copied).
2. Touch <-> <+> to set "Track" (the track to be copied).

Settings: ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO, CONTROL

If you select "ALL," the recording in all the tracks will be copied.

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .

2. Touch the "From" value (the measure at which copying will begin).

3. Touch <><+ to set "From" (the measure at which copying will begin).
   10.When you're done making the settings, touch .

4. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures to be copied).
5. Touch <-> <+> to set "For" (the number of measures to be copied).

If you want to specify all of the data up to the final measure, select "ALL."

13.When you're done making the settings, touch .
14. Touch the "To" value (the copy-destination measure number).
15. Touch <-> <+> to set "To" (the copy-destination measure number).

If you select "END," the data will be copied following the end of the last measure.

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch the "Time" value (the number of times that the data will be copied).
3. Touch <-> <+> to set "Time" (the number of times that the data will be copied).
   19.When you're done making the settings, touch .
4. Touch .

The following display appears.

To cancel operation, touch <Cancel> .

1. Touch to copy the measures.

Once the measures have been copied, you are returned to the Copy screen.

Correct Timing Inaccuracies (Quantize)

You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded performance by having the music be aligned with a timing you specify. This is called "Quantizing."

For example even if you intend to play at quarter-note timing, the notes may be slightly earlier or later than precise quarter-note intervals. In this case, if you quantize at quarter-note (1/4) timing, you can correctly match the rhythms.

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rec/Play screen appears.

1. In the Rec/Play screen, touch < > (Utility) to open the Utility screen.

1. In the Utility screen, touch .

The Edit Menu screen appears.

4. Touch .

The Quantize screen appears.

1. Touch the "Track" value (the track that will be quantized).
2. Touch <-> <+> to specify the "Track" (the track that will be quantized).

Settings ALL, RHYTHM, ACCOMP, BASS, LOWER, UPPER, SOLO

If you select "ALL," the recording in all the tracks will be quantized.

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch the "From" value (the measure at which quantization will begin).
3. Touch <-> <+> to set "From" (the measure at which quantization will begin).

10.When you're done making the settings, touch .
11. Touch the "For" value (the number of measures that will be quantized).
12. Touch <-> <+> to set "For" (the number of measures that will be quantized).

To specify everything through to the last measure, set "for: ALL."

13.When you're done making the settings, touch .
14. Touch the "Resolution" value (the resolution at which notes will be aligned).
15. Touch <-> <+> to set "Resolution" (the resolution at which notes will be aligned).

The "Resolution" (the timing to which notes are aligned) can be set to one of the following settings.

1. When you're done making the settings, touch .
2. Touch . The following display appears.

To cancel operation, touch .

1. Touch to have the quantization carried out.

When the quantizing is finished, you are returned to the Quantize screen.

Chapter 9 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms

You can edit some of the internal rhythms to create your own original rhythms. These original rhythms are called "User rhythms." This function is called "Rhythm Customize."

Process for Creating User Rhythms

Preparations for Creating User Rhythms

Copying the User Rhythm

• Copy User Rhythm on Floppy Disks to the User Memory
• Copy User Rhythm on User Memory to the Floppy Disks

Preparations for Creating User Rhythms

Displaying the Rhythm Customize Screen

1. Touch on the Main screen.

The Rhythm screen appears.

1. In the Rhythm screen, touch < 0> (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch.

The Rhythm Customize screen appears.

When opening a new Rhythm Customize screen

When calling up a source.

1	Rhythm Name
2	Beat
3	Tempo
4	Division Name (p. 175)
5	buttonSwitches the page when the rhythm pattern is displayed over multiple pages.
6	(Zoom Out/Zoom In) buttonExpands (zooms in) and reduces (zooms out) the rhythm pattern display.
7	Current location (Measure: Beat: Tick)
8	Instrument NameIndicates the name of the instrument used in the rhythm.
9	Rhythm Pattern DisplayDisplays the notes in the selected rhythm pattern.
10	(Ultility) buttonDisplays the menu with settings for the Rhythm Customize function.
11	(Preview) buttonAllows you to listen to the created rhythm.
12	(Copy) buttonDeletes the rhythm in the displayed measure.
13	(Copy) buttonCopies the rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it to the end of that measure.
14	buttonWhen more than eight different instruments are used in a rhythm, press these buttons to switch through the instrument names.
15	Scroll BarThis indicates the position of the current measure in the overall rhythm.

Selecting the Division

What is the Division?

A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro, melody A, melody B, bridge and ending.

With the AT-80SL/60SL, such changes in songs are allocated to the following six performance states. We call these six parts of a song "Divisions."

Division	Performance division
Intro	The intro is played at the start of a song.
Original	This is a basic accompaniment pattern.
Fill In To Variation	This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes. It is used to make a song more lively. After the phrase is played, the variation's accompaniment pattern is played.
Variation	This is a developmental accompaniment pattern. It is a variation on an Original.
Fill In To Original	This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes. It is used to make a song more sedate. After the phrase is played, the original's accompaniment pattern is played.
Ending	This is played at the end of a song.

You can make a song more lively or more restrained by increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can also modify a song by changing the voice of the parts in the Divisions.

1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).

1. Touch < 0> (Utility).

The Utility screen appears.

1. Touch
   (Division Select).

   

   

   You can open the Division Select screen by touching the Division name indication (p. 174) in the Rhythm Customize screen.

   1. Touch a Division name to select the Division.

   

   This returns you to the Rhythm Customize screen. The name of the selected division now appears in the Rhythm Customize screen.

   You can touch < 1 / 2> to hear how the rhythm sounds.

   Loading the Rhythm

   Use the Rhythm Customize function to select the rhythm you want to use as the base for the rhythm you are creating.

   1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).

   

   1. Touch < 0> (Utility).

   The Utility screen appears.

   

   1. Touch.

   The Rhythm Load screen appears.

   

   1. Touch a Rhythm group name.

   The sub-window for selecting the rhythm group appears.

   

   1. Touch a Rhythm group name on the sub-window to select the Rhythm group.

   The Rhythm Load screen reappears.

   

   1. Touch <> to switch the screen, then touch a rhythm name to select the rhythm.

   

   You can touch to hear how the rhythm sounds.

   1. Touch <-> <+> to select the Division you want to call up.

   Selecting "ALL" calls up all of the Divisions.

   1. Touch.

   The rhythm is called up, and the Rhythm Customize screen returns to the display.

   Making the Division Settings

   Independent "Drum Set," "Beat," and "Volume" settings can be made for each Division.

   1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).

   

   1. Touch < 0> (Utility).

   The Utility screen appears.

   

   1. Touch
      (Division Options).

      The Division Options screen appears.

      

      Changing the Drum Set

      1. Touch the value set for Drum Set

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.
      2. Touch. The Division Options screen reappears.

      Changing the Beat

      1. Touch the Beat setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.
      2. Touch. The Division Options screen reappears.

      Changing the Volume

      1. Touch the Volume setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      2. Touch .

      The Division Options screen reappears.

      ■ Editing the Rhythm

      Edit the internal rhythm.

      What you can do	Page
      Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure	p. 178
      Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected Measure	p. 178
      Erasing Sounds	p. 179
      Adding Sounds	p. 179
      Altering Voices	p. 180
      Changing the Velocity	p. 180
      Moving Sounds	p. 180

      Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure

      1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).

      

      1. Touch <Copy> (to copy the selected measure).

      The following screen appears.

      

      To cancel operation, touch .

      1. Touch.

      Copies the rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it to the end of that measure.

      Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected Measure

      1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).

      

      1. Touch <Del> (to copy the selected measure).

      The following screen appears.

      

      To cancel operation, touch .

      1. Touch.

      The selected measure is deleted.

      Editing the Sounds

      You can add and erase sounds, alter voices, and change the velocity.

      1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).

      

      1. Touch the point on the screen where the sound you want to edit is located.

      When you touch the screen, a line appears at the point you touch. By holding your finger to the screen and moving it to the left or right, you can have the line move along with your finger.

      

      The information on the location (Measure: Beat: Tick) of the line on the screen is displayed.

      When you remove your finger from the screen, the Note Edit screen opens, and the note positioned at the line in the Rhythm Customize screen is displayed.

      

      

      You can touch < to open the Utility screen, and then touch in the Utility screen to open the Note Edit screen.

      Erasing Sounds

      1. Touch < > < > to select the point where you want to delete the sound.

      

      1. When you touch <Erase> , the selected sound is erased.

      Adding Sounds

      1. Touch <> <> to select the point where you want to add the sound.

      

      1. When you touch < Create , the new sound is added after the selected sound.

      Altering Voices

      1. Touch < > < > to select the sound whose voice you want to change.
      2. Touch the Instrument name.

      

      1. Touch < -8><-1><+1><+8> to switch the voice.

      Changing the Velocity

      1. Touch <> <> to select the sound whose velocity you want to change.
      2. Touch the Velocity setting.

      

      1. Touch < -10 > < -1 > < +1 > < +10 > to change the velocity.

      Moving Sounds

      1. Touch <> > <> to select the sound you want to move.
      2. Touch the "Meas Beat Tick" setting.

      The note-location display uses "Measure: Beat: Tick" as the format. A tick is a unit of time that's shorter than a beat.

      

      1. Touch < -30 > < -1 > < +1 > < +30 > to move the sound.

      With the Rhythm Customize function, note locations are expressed in terms of "Measure: Beat: Tick." One tick is the smallest unit used in indicating the location of the note, and there are 120 ticks in a quarter note. Typical notes might be indicated as shown below.

      
      Quarter Note

      8th Note Triplet

      16th Note

      

      

      The ticks for each note have the following characteristics.

      Quarter Note	0 (Every 120 ticks)
      8th Note	0, 60 (Every 60 ticks)
      8th Note Triplet	0, 40, 80 (Every 40 ticks)
      16the Note	0, 30, 60, 90 (Every 30 ticks)

      Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used

      You can change an instrument used in a rhythm and replace it with another instrument.

      1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).

      

      1. Touch the section in the Rhythm Customize screen where the instrument names are displayed. The Instrument Edit screen appears.

      

      

      You can open Instrument Edit screen using the following procedure

      1. Touch < 8> (Utility) in the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).

      The Utility screen appears.

      

      1. Touch (Instrument Edit).

      The Instrument Edit screen appears.

      hanging the Instrument Used

      1. Touch <> <> in the screen to select the name of the instrument you want to change.
      2. Touch.

      The following screen appears.

      

      1. Touch <1><2 to switch the screen, then touch the instrument name.

      The following screen appears.

      

      To cancel operation, touch <Cancel> .

      1. If you want to change the instrument, touch .

      The instrument is changed.

      Deleting an Instrument

      When an instrument is deleted, all of the sounds using that instrument are deleted from the rhythm.

      1. Touch <><> in the screen to select the name of the instrument you want to delete.
      2. Touch on the Instrument Edit screen.

      

      1. If you are sure that you wish to delete the instrument, touch .

      The selected instrument is deleted.

      ■ Deleting Rhythms You Have Created

      This deletes User rhythms created by partially editing the internal rhythms.

      1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
      2. Touch < 0> (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      

      1. Touch.

      The following screen appears.

      

      To cancel operation, touch .

      1. If you are sure that you wish to delete the rhythm, touch .

      Changing the Name of a User Rhythm (Rename)

      1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
      2. Touch < 8> (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch .

      The Rhythm Save screen appears.

      

      1. Touch.

      The Rename screen appears.

      

      1. Touch the character select button (ABC/abc/12%) to switch among uppercase/toLowerCase/symbols.

      Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices, like this: uppercase lowercase symbols uppercase...

      1. Touch the screen to specify the desired character.

      The following characters can be selected.

      ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUWXYZ
      abcdefghijklmnpqrstuvwxyz
      !"#%&'( )*+, -./:=?^_0123456789
      Del	Deletes a character.
      Space	Inserts a space (blank).
      ←→	Move the cursor (the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input) to left or right.

      To cancel operation, touch .

      1. When you're done making the settings, touch OK>.

      Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or Floppy Disk

      You can take User rhythms created with the Rhythm Customize function and save them in the AT-80SL/60SL's User memory and floppy disks. To call up rhythms saved in User memory, press the [Disk/User] button.

      1. Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen (p. 174).
      2. Touch < 0> (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      

      1. Touch.

      The Rhythm Save screen appears.

      

      1. Touch < > (floppy disk) or

      User > (User memory) to determine the save destination.

      1. Touch <> <> to select the number of the save destination.

      Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as "---".

      

      To cancel the save, touch the to close the Rhythm Save screen.

      You can change the name of a rhythm by touching. .

      1. Touch .

      The User rhythms are saved to the User memory or to floppy disks.

      

      You can save rhythms after changing the tempo by touching the Tempo [ ] [▶] button.

      If the following screen appears

      The following screen appears if you select a number to which a rhythm has already been saved and then touch .

      

      If you wish to overwrite the rhythm

      1. Touch .

      The Rhythm will be rewritten.

      If you wish to save new data instead of updating the rhythm

      1. Touch .

      Rewriting of the Rhythm will be canceled.

      1. In the Rhythm Save screen, select the number that is displayed as "----" (a number that currently does not contain rhythm data).
      2. Save the Rhythm.

      Chapter 10 Various Other Settings

      Adjusting How the Instrument Responds

      ■ Turning Aftertouch On/Off

      This switches the aftertouch setting for the Upper keyboard. Aftertouch applies vibrato when additional pressure is placed on the keys that are being played.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

      

      2. Touch.

      The Upper Keyboard screen appears.

      3. Touch <><> to display the After Touch.

      

      4. Touch the After Touch setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

      Each time you touch the After Touch setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

      Settings ON, OFF

      5. Touch.

      NOTE

      Please note that not all the voices on the Upper keyboard are responsive to Aftertouch, even if the feature is set to ON (p. 220).

      Adjusting the Depth of Aftertouch

      This adjusts the depth of the Aftertouch effect.

      1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
      2. Touch. The Upper Keyboard screen appears.
      3. Touch <><> to display the After Touch Sensitivity.

      

      4. Touch the After Touch Sensitivity value (1-10).

      

      5. Touch <-> <+> to edit the value.

      Setting 1-10

      Higher settings of this value will allow deeper vibrato to be applied when you apply pressure to the keyboard.

      6. Touch.

      NOTE

      Aftertouch can only be enabled for the Upper keyboard.

      Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity

      Initial Touch is a function that translates the force used in playing the keys into a directly proportional amount of volume. This adjusts the amount of the Initial Touch effect applied.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

      1. Touch either <UPPER> , or <LOWER> .

      UPPER	To change the initial touch setting of the Upper part
      LOWER	To change the initial touch setting of the Lower part

      1. Touch <><> to display the Initial Touch.

      

      1. Touch the Initial Touch value (OFF, 1-10).

      Setting OFF, 1-10

      Setting	Descriptions
      1-10	Initial Touch is on. The harder you play the key, the higher the volume. The change in volume when the keys are played forcefully increases as the value is increased.
      OFF	Initial Touch is off. Volume remains constant regardless of how hard you play.

      1. Touch.

      Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony

      You can set the Bass Pedalboard to play simultaneous multiple notes or single notes only.

      1. Touch on the Main screen. The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.
      2. Touch . The Pedalboard screen appears.
      3. Touch <><> to display the PedalBass Mode.

      

      1. Touch the PedalBass Mode setting to switch between "MONOPHONIC" and "POLYPHONIC."

      Each time you touch the PedalBass Mode setting, it will alternate between "MONOPHONIC" and "POLYPHONIC."

      Setting	Descriptions
      MONOPHONIC	Only single notes can be played.
      POLYPHONIC	Multiple notes can be played.

      1. Touch.

      Performance Function Settings

      Selecting the Range of Keys to Which the Damper Pedal will Apply

      You can specify which keyboard will be affected when you press the Damper (Sustain) pedal.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

      1. Touch .

      The Controller screen appears.

      1. Touch <> to display the Damper Pedal.

      

      1. Touch the Damper Pedal setting to switch between "to UPPER" and "to LOWER."

      Each time you touch the Damper Pedal setting, it will alternate between "to UPPER" and "to LOWER."

      Setting	Descriptions
      to UPPER	The effect is applied to the voices played on the Upper keyboard.
      to LOWER	The effect is applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard.

      1. Touch.

      NOTE

      If the voice is a percussive voice (such as a Piano voice), the tone will be sustained, but fade away just like an acoustic piano. If the voice is a non-percussive instrument (such as a String voice), the tone will be sustained as long as the pedal is depressed.

      Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal

      Specify how the Expression Pedal will function when your performance is being recorded and when ATELIER song files are being played back.

      Function During Recording

      Specify whether Expression Pedal operations will be recorded or not while your performance is being recorded.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

      1. Touch .

      The Controller screen appears.

      1. Touch <><> to display the Exp. Src (Rec).

      

      1. Touch the Exp. Src (Rec) setting to switch between "PEDAL" and "COMPOSER."

      Each time you touch the Exp. Src (Rec) setting, it will alternate between "PEDAL" and "COMPOSER."

      Setting	Descriptions
      PEDAL	Expression Pedal movements will be recorded. The previous recording will be erased as new songs are recorded.
      COMPOSER	Expression Pedal movements will not be recorded. The previous data will remain without being erased.

      1. Touch.

      Function During Playback

      You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will function while ATELIER song files are being played back.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

      1. Touch .

      The Controller screen appears.

      1. Touch <> <> to display the Exp. Src (Play).

      

      1. Touch the Exp. Src (Play) setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      Setting	Descriptions
      PEDAL+COMPOSER	The Expression Pedal will function. Expression Pedal recording within the song file will also be effective.
      COMPOSER	The Expression Pedal will not function. The Expression Pedal recording within the song file will be effective.
      PEDAL	The Expression Pedal will function. The Expression Pedal recording within the song file will be ignored.

      1. Touch.

      Selecting the Range of Keys to Which the Pitch Bend/Vibrato Lever will Apply

      This setting determines which keyboard will be controlled by the Pitch Bend/Vibrato lever.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

      1. Touch .

      The Controller screen appears.

      1. Touch <><> to display the Bender/Vibrato.

      

      1. Touch the Bender/Vibrato setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      Setting	Descriptions
      to UPPER	The effect is applied to the voices played on the Upper keyboard.
      to LOWER	The effect is applied to the voices played on the Lower keyboard.
      to PEDAL	The effect is applied to the voices played on the Pedalboard.

      1. Touch.

      Changing the Pitch Bend Range

      This setting allows you to choose the maximum amount of Pitch change (range) permissible when using Pitch Bend. The range can be set anywhere between 1-12 (in semitone units; with a maximum of one octave).

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Sound/Keyboard screen appears.

      1. Touch .

      The Controller screen appears.

      1. Touch <> to display the Pitch Bend Range.

      

      1. Touch the Pitch Bend Range setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      Settings 1-12 (semitone steps)

      1. Touch.

      NOTE

      Drums/SFX is fixed at one octave range, regardless of this setting.

      Rhythm Settings

      ■ Turning Chord Hold On/Off

      The Chord Hold function can be switched ON/OFF. When Chord Hold is ON, the Automatic Accompaniment will continue playing even when you lift your hand from the keyboard to play a new chord.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Rhythm screen appears.

      1. Touch < 0> (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Rhythm Options screen appears.

      1. Touch <>> <> to display the Chord Hold.

      

      1. Touch the Chord Hold setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

      Each time you touch the Chord Hold setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

      Setting	Descriptions
      ON	The Automatic Accompaniment determined by the chord played on the Lower keyboard is held (even if you release the keys).
      OFF	When you release the keys that you played in the Lower keyboard, the Automatic Accompaniment will stop (be muted). Only the Rhythm (drum) performance will continue.

      1. Touch.

      Count Down Sound

      You can change the sound that is used for the count played at the end of the intro with the Intro Countdown function (p. 68).

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Rhythm screen appears.

      1. Touch < 8 (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Rhythm Options screen appears.

      1. Touch <> to display the Count Down Sound.

      

      1. Touch the Count Down Sound setting to switch between "VOICE" and "STICK."

      Each time you touch the Count Down Sound setting, it will alternate between "VOICE" and "STICK."

      Setting	Descriptions
      VOICE	Human voice count (One, two, three...)
      STICK	Stick sound count

      1. Touch.

      Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Switching Automatically

      You can prevent rhythm tempos from switching automatically when you switch rhythms.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Rhythm screen appears.

      1. Touch < 0> (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Rhythm Options screen appears.

      1. Touch <><> to display the Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard Tempo).

      

      1. Touch the Auto Std Tempo setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

      Each time you touch the Auto Std Tempo setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

      Setting	Descriptions
      ON	Switching the rhythm while the rhythm is stopped automatically changes the tempo settings to those in the new rhythm.
      OFF	The tempo settings are not changed automatically when the rhythms are changed.

      1. Touch.

      

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      Registration Settings

      Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are Recalled

      You can specify how the settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled when you press a Registration button.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The sub-window appears.

      1. Touch .

      The Registration Load screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Registration Options screen appears.

      

      1. Touch the Arranger Update setting to switch between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

      Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting, it will alternate between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

      Setting	Descriptions
      DELAYED	Settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled when you hold a Registration button for several seconds. If you quickly press the Registration button, only the panel settings (voice, etc.) that are not related to Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be updated.
      INSTANT	Settings related to Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled the instant you press a button along with all other panel settings.

      1. Touch.

      

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled

      You can specify how the transpose setting will be recalled when you press a Registration button.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The sub-window appears.

      1. Touch .

      The Registration Load screen appears.

      1. Touch .

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Registration Options screen appears.

      

      1. Touch the Trans. Update (Transpose Update) setting to switch between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

      Each time you touch the Trans. Update setting, it will alternate between "DELAYED" and "INSTANT."

      Setting	Descriptions
      DELAYED	Transpose settings will be recalled when you hold a Registration button for several seconds.
      INSTANT	Transpose setting will be recalled the instant you press a button along with all other panel settings.

      1. Touch.

      

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      Composer settings

      Switching the Display of Lyrics On or Off

      Some music files have Lyrics included and these Lyrics can be displayed on the screen. You can turn on or off the lyrics display of such music files.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Rec/Play screen appears.

      1. Touch < 8> (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

      1. Touch <>> <> to display the Lyric.

      

      1. Touch the Lyric setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

      Each time you touch the Lyric setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

      Setting	Descriptions
      ON	Lyrics will be displayed
      OFF	Lyrics will not be displayed

      1. Touch.

      NOTE

      If you press a voice select button while playing back music files that contains lyrics, the display screen will switch, and the lyrics will no longer be displayed. To re-display the lyrics, touch on Rec/Play screen once again.

      MEMO

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs (Play Transpose)

      SMF music files or a performance that you yourself recorded can be transposed for playback.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Rec/Play screen appears.

      1. Touch < 0> (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

      1. Touch <> to display the Play Transpose.

      

      1. Touch the Play Transpose setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      The key is transposed by one semitone each time the

      < -> or < +> key is touched.

      Settings -24 +24 (semitone steps)

      1. Touch.

      Changing the Metronome Setting

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Rec/Play screen appears.

      1. Touch < 0> (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

      1. Touch <><> to display the Metronome.

      

      1. Touch the Metronome setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      Setting	Descriptions
      OFF	Not heard at all
      REC	Heard only while recording
      ON	Heard constantly

      1. Touch.

      Adjusting the Metronome Volume

      You can adjust the volume of the metronome.

      1. Touch on the Main screen. The Rec/Play screen appears.
      2. Touch < 0> (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

      1. Touch <><> to display the Metronome Vol. (Metronome Volume).

      

      1. Touch Metronome Vol. setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      Settings 1-10

      Increasing the value will raise the volume of the metronome.

      1. Touch.

      Changing the Sound of the Metronome

      You can choose one of 4 different sounds for the metronome.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Rec/Play screen appears.

      1. Touch < 0> (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

      1. Touch <><> to display the Metronome Sound.

      

      1. Touch the Metronome Sound setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      Setting	Descriptions
      CLICK&BELL	Conventional metronome sound
      ELECTRONIC	Electronic metronome sound
      VOICE ENG.	Human voice (English)
      VOICE JPN.	Human voice (Japanese)

      1. Touch.

      

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      Setting the Beat

      This setting determines the beat to be used when recording performance songs.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The Rec/Play screen appears.

      1. Touch < 0> (Utility).

      The Utility screen appears.

      1. Touch.

      The Rec/Play Options screen appears.

      1. Touch <> <> to display the Beat.

      

      1. Touch the Beat setting.

      The time signature setting screen appears.

      

      1. Touch the time signature that you wish to set.
      2. Touch.

      

      When recording Rhythm performances or Automatic

      Accompaniment, the beat is set automatically.

      

      You cannot change the beat of previously recorded songs.

      Other Settings

      Adjust the Standard Pitch (Master Tune)

      The basic pitch of an instrument is generally considered as the pitch of the middle A note. The "Master Tune" parameter lets you adjust this basic pitch to match the pitch of any other instruments that are playing together with the AT-80SL/60SL.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      1. Touch <> <> to display the Master Tune.

      

      1. Touch the Master Tune setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      Settings 415.3Hz-466.2Hz (0.1 Hz units)

      1. Touch.

      

      By touching < > , you can restore the default setting (440.0 Hz).

      

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      ■ Mic Echo

      You can adjust the Mic echo.

      

      Connecting the Microphone (p. 22)

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      1. Touch <><> to display the Mic Echo.

      

      1. Touch the Mic Echo setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      Settings 0-12

      1. Touch.

      

      By touching < > , you can restore the default setting (4).

      

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers

      Transmission of PC (Program Change) numbers can be switched ON/OFF when a Registration is selected.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      1. Touch <> to display the Send PC Switch.

      

      1. Touch the Send PC Switch setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

      Each time you touch the Send PC Switch setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

      Setting	Descriptions
      ON	PC numbers are transmitted
      OFF	PC numbers are not transmitted

      1. Touch.

      

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      Setting the PC Number

      You can specify the Program Change number that will be transmitted from MIDI Out when a Registration is selected.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      1. Touch <><> to display the Bank MSB (Bank Select MSB), Bank LSB (Bank Select LSB), or PC Number (Program Change Number).

      

      1. Touch either (Bank Select MSB), (Bank Select LSB), or (Program Change Number) setting.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      Menu	Setting
      Bank MSB	0-127
      Bank LSB	0-127
      PC Number	1-128

      1. Touch.

      MIDI IN Mode

      This instrument contains two sound generators: one for GM2/GS data playback and one for keyboard performance. Normally, data received at the MIDI In connector will control only the sound generator for GM2/GS data playback. However by changing the MIDI IN Mode setting, you can also control the keyboard sound generator from MIDI In.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      2. Touch <><> to display the MIDI IN Mode.

      

      3. Touch the MIDI IN Mode setting to switch between "MODE 1" and "MODE 2."

      Each time you touch the MIDI IN Mode setting, it will alternate between "Mode 1" and "Mode 2."

      MODE 1	Control the instrument as a GS sound generator
      MODE 2	Channels 5 through 10 and Channels 12, 14, 15 are transmitted to the GS sound generator, and all other channels are transmitted to the keyboard sound generator.

      Channel	MODE 1	MODE 2
      1	GS	Solo
      2	GS	Pedal/GS *
      3	GS	Lower
      4	GS	Upper
      5–10	GS	GS
      11	GS	Drum/SFX
      12	GS	GS
      13	GS	Manual Percussion
      14–15	GS	GS
      16	GS	Control

      • When the pedal part button is ON, data received at the MIDI In connector will control the pedal part of keyboard sound generator. When the pedal part button is OFF, data received at the MIDI In connector will control the GS sound generator.

      4. Touch.

      

      There are limitations on the types of MIDI messages that can be received by the keyboard sound source. For details refer to the "MIDI IMPLEMENTATION" (sold separately).

      

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      Selecting the MIDI Transmit Channel

      When you use the MIDI connectors or the computer connector of the AT-80SL/60SL to transmit musical data to external devices, for each keyboard (Upper, Lower, and Pedal) you can specify the channel on which your playing will be transmitted as MIDI messages.

      

      For details refer to p. 208.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      

      

      

      1. Touch , , , , , or (Tx MIDI Ch. Control).

      The Control part transmits Expression pedal data and PC numbers.

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      

      Channel 1-16

      1. Touch.

      NOTE

      MIDI messages for the Solo part will be transmitted only when the Solo [To Lower] button is ON.

      ■ Repositioning the Touch Screen

      If you've been using the Touch Screen for some time, the pointer may be shifted, making the AT-80SL/60SL react incorrectly. You should correct this displacement when necessary by performing calibration (repositioning).

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      1. In the System screen, touch .

      The Utility screen appears.

      

      1. Touch .

      

      A display will ask for confirmation.

      To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel> .

      1. Touch on the screen.
      2. Touch the points indicated on the touch screen.

      NOTE

      Do this carefully, because touching a location that's different from the one indicated for the pointer may make the displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer accurately. If the following display appears, perform the touch panel position adjustment once again.

      

      Displaying a Graphic at Power-up (AT-80SL)

      The AT-80SL allows you to load a favorite graphic into internal memory, and have it be displayed when the power is turned on.

      1. Use your computer to create a graphic image file that meets the following criteria:

      Size	320 x 240 pixels
      Color	8 bit (256 colors)
      Format	image saved in BMP format
      Name	1-8 characters in length (lowercase is ok). A filename extension of“.BMP” (uppercase characters) must be added after the name.The following characters can be used to name an image.A BC D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 # $ % & ‘ ) - @ ~ {}^ _!NOTEIf you use a character that cannot be used in a name, it will be replaced by another character when displayed.

      1. Use your computer to save the graphic image file on a DOS format floppy disk.
      2. Insert the floppy disk containing the graphic image file into the floppy disk drive of the AT-80SL.
      3. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.
      4. In the System screen, touch .

      

      1. Touch . The BMP Installer screen appears.

      

      Display	Explanation
      01-03	Images stored in internal memory
      View	View an image stored in internal memory.
      Load...	Load an image from floppy disk into internal memory.
      Clear...	Delete an image from internal memory.

      MEMO

      The AT-80SL can store up to three images. If two or more images are stored in internal memory, those images will be displayed consecutively after the power is turned on.

      1. In the screen, touch <01> - <03> to select the destination at which the image is to be saved.

      

      1. Touch. The BMP Load screen appears.

      

      The name of images saved on the floppy disk will be displayed.

      1. Touch <0><0 to select the image that you want to load into internal memory.

      

      You can touch <View> to verify the image.

      10.Touch.

      The image will be loaded.

      

      If an image is already stored at the load destination, the following screen will appear.

      

      To erase the currently loaded image, and load the new image

      1. Touch .

      To cancel image loading

      1. Touch.

      

      If the image cannot be loaded, the following screen will appear.

      

      - Deleting an Image Stored in Internal Memory

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      1. In the System screen, touch .

      

      1. Touch .

      

      The BMP Installer screen appears.

      

      1. In the screen, touch <01> - <03> to select the destination at which the image is to be saved.

      

      You can touch <View> to verify the image.

      1. Touch

      The following screen appears.

      

      To cancel without deleting the image, touch .

      1. Touch .

      The image will be deleted.

      Switching the Background of the Main Screen

      You can change the color and pattern for the main screen's background.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      1. Touch <><> to display the Main Background.

      

      1. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      

      1. Touch.

      The System screen appears.

      1. Touch on the System Screen.

      The main screen appears with the selected background.

      

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the Main Screen

      You can set the main screen so that the bouncing ball does not appear.

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      1. Touch <><> to display the Main Bouncing Ball.

      

      1. Touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

      Each time you touch the Main Boucing Ball setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

      Setting	Descriptions
      ON	The bouncing ball appears in the main screen.
      OFF	The bouncing ball does not appear in the main screen.

      1. Touch.

      

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      Using the V-LINK function

      Connecting the AT-80SL/60SL to a V-LINK compatible image device allows you to control the images with the AT-80SL/60SL.

      V-LINK

      V-LINK ( V-LINK ) is functionality promoted by Roland that allows linked performance of music and visual material. By using V-LINK-compatible video equipment, visual effects can be easily liked to, and made part of the expressive elements of a performance.

      How to Use the V-LINK

      1. Touch on the Main screen. The System screen appears.
      2. Touch <> to display the V-LINK.

      

      1. Touch the V-LINK setting.
      2. Touch <-> <+> to change the setting.

      Setting	Descriptions
      OFF	The V-LINK function is switched off.
      MODE 1	The V-LINK function is switched on. You can now control the video images using the Registration buttons.
      MODE 2	The V-LINK function is switched on. You can now control the video images using the twelve keys at the very right of the lower keyboard and Registration buttons. No sound is produced when you press any of the twelve keys at the right end of the keyboard.

      1. Touch.

      The V-LINK function is turned on, and the V-LINK icon appears in the main screen.

      

      

      The Send PC Switch settings is automatically switched to ON when V-LINK is on (MODE 1, MODE 2). When the V-LINK function is switched off, the Send PC Switch setting reverts to the setting in effect before V-LINK was switched on.

      When V-LINK is set to "MODE 1"

      When a Registration button is pressed, "Bank Select" and "Program Change Number" messages are transmitted from the MIDI Out connector as video control messages. At this time, the Control MIDI transmit channel setting is disregarded, and the messages are transmitted via Channel 16.

      When V-LINK is set to "MODE 2"

      In addition to the functions of "MODE 1," MODE 2 also sets the device to transmit "Note messages" as video control messages from the MIDI Out connector when one of the twelve rightmost keys in the Lower keyboard is pressed.

      In this case, the Lower and Solo MIDI transmit channel settings are disregarded, and the messages are transmitted via Channel 16.

      NOTE

      The MIDI transmit channel used for video control messages is fixed at channel 16.

      NOTE

      For more on switching video images, refer to the owner's manual for the connected device.

      

      You can also use the following procedure to turn the V-LINK function on.

      1. Hold down the Composer [Reset] button and press either the Upper Organ [Full 1] button or the Upper Organ [Full 2] button.

      Holding down theComposer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 1] button switches the instrument to "MODE 1" (p. 201). Holding down theComposer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 2] button switches the instrument to "MODE 2" (p. 201).

      The display changes as shown below, and the AT-80SL/ 60SL switches to Image Control mode.

      Video Link System is ON.

      The V-LINK function is turned on, and the V-LINK icon appears in the main screen.

      

      2. To cancel the V-LINK function, once again hold down the Composer [Reset] button and press either the Upper Organ [Full 1] button or the Upper Organ [Full 2] button.

      If set to "MODE 1" (p. 201), holding down theComposer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 1] button switches the V-LINK function off. If set to "MODE 2" (p. 201), holding down theComposer [Reset] button and pressing the Upper Organ [Full 2] button switches the V-LINK function off.

      Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors (AT-80SL)

      

      The functions of the jacks on the bottom of the keyboard are described below.

      1. Illumination Switch p. 22
      2. Phones Jack p. 21
      3. Mic Volume Knob p. 22
      4. Mic In Jack p. 22
      5. LCD Contrast Knob

      Adjust the brightness of the touch panel.

      1. Computer Connector

      You can connect a computer to the AT-80SL and exchange performance data between the two.

      1. Computer Switch

      Set this switch to Mac, PC-1, or PC-2 according to the type computer that's connected. Additionally, this switches between MIDI In connector and the Computer connector.

      1. MIDI In/Out Connectors

      You can connect external MIDI devices to the AT-80SL and exchange performance data between them.

      1. Video Out Jack

      You can connect a TV to display lyrics.

      10.Input switch p.205
      11.Input L(mono)/R Jacks

      Using this jack, you can connect other sound generating devices or audio equipment and play sounds from other devices through the AT-80SL's speaker.

      12.Output Lmono)/R Jacks

      You can some sounds if you connect speakers or other audio equipment to these jacks. You can also hook up a cassette recorder to record your performances.

      13.Aux Out L(mono)/R

      You can connect an external speaker or a reverb unit to obtain a more spacious reverb.

      Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors (AT-60SL)

      

      The functions of the jacks on the bottom of the keyboard are described below.

      1. Phones Jack p. 21
      2. Mic Volume Knob p. 22
      3. Mic In Jack p. 22
      4. LCD Contrast Knob

      Adjust the brightness of the touch panel.

      1. Computer Connector

      You can connect a computer to the AT-60SL and exchange performance data between the two.

      1. Computer Switch

      Set this switch to Mac, PC-1, or PC-2 according to the type computer that's connected. Additionally, this switches between MIDI In connector and the Computer connector.

      1. MIDI In/Out Connectors

      You can connect external MIDI devices to the AT-60SL and exchange performance data between them.

      1. Input switch p. 205
      2. Input L(mono)/R Jacks

      Using this jack, you can connect other sound generating devices or audio equipment and play sounds from other devices through the AT-60SL's speaker.

      10.Output L(mono)/R Jacks

      You can some sounds if you connect speakers or other audio equipment to these jacks. You can also hook up a cassette recorder to record your performances.

      Connecting to Audio Equipment

      When you connect the AT-80SL/60SL to audio equipment, you can play the sounds from the AT-80SL/60SL through the speakers on the audio equipment or record your performances on a tape recorder or other recording device.

      

      When connecting, please use an audio cable with a standard phone plug, such as the PCS-100PW (sold separately). When purchasing an audio cable, please consult the vendor where you bought the AT-80SL/60SL.

      Connectors

      Output Jacks

      You can connect audio equipment using audio cables (sold separately) and play the sounds from the AT-80SL/60SL through the speakers on the connected equipment or record your performances on a tape recorder or other recording device.

      If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must use the L (Mono) jack.

      AT-80SL

      Output
      Main		Aux
      L(mono)	R	L(mono)	R

      

      

      

      

      AT-60SL

      

      L(mono)

      R

      

      

      Input Jacks

      You can connect another sound module, such as audio equipment or an electronic instrument using audio cables (sold separately) and play the sounds from the connected device through the speakers on the AT-80SL/60SL.

      If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must use the L (Mono) jack.

      

      When using the Input jacks to play the sound from an external device through the speakers of the AT-80SL/60SL, you can apply the internal RSS reverb of the AT-80SL/60SL (p. 210).

      Input switch position	Effect
      Normal	The sound of the external device will be heard without modification.
      RSS	The RSS reverb of the AT-80SL/60SL will be applied to the external device.

      

      If the Input switch is set to "RSS," you can use the AT-80SL/ 60SL's [Master Volume] slider to adjust the volume of the external device.

      

      If the Input switch is set to "RSS," RSS reverb will also be applied to the sound of the microphone. In this case, use the [Mic Volume] bnob to adjust the microphone volume.

      Making the Connections

      

      When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other equipment.

      Playing Sounds from the AT-80SL/60SL Through the Speakers on Audio Equipment or Recording Your Performances on a Recording Device

      1. Turn the volume all the way down on the AT80SL/60SL and on the device you're about to connect.
      2. Turn off the power to the AT-80SL/60SL and other connected equipment.
      3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the connection.

      4. Switch on the AT-80SL/60SL.

      5. Switch on the connected device.

      6. Adjust the volume level on the AT-80SL/60SL and the connected device.

      Recording AT-80SL/60SL Performances on a Recording Device

      1. Start recording with the connected device.
      2. Play the keyboard.
      3. When the performance ends, stop recording on the connected equipment.

      After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.

      1. Turn the volume all the way down on the AT80SL/60SL and on the device you're about to connect.
      2. Turn off the connected equipment.
      3. Turn off the AT-80SL/60SL.

      Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the Speakers on the AT-80SL/60SL

      1. Turn the volume all the way down on the AT-80SL/60SL and on the device you're about to connect.
      2. Turn off the power to the AT-80SL/60SL and other connected equipment.
      3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the connection.
      4. Turn on the connected equipment.
      5. Turn on the AT-80SL/60SL.
      6. Adjust the volume level on the AT-80SL/60SL and the connected device.

      After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.

      1. Turn the volume all the way down on the AT80SL/60SL and on the device you're about to connect.
      2. Turn off the AT-80SL/60SL.
      3. Turn off the connected equipment.

      Connecting a Computer

      By connecting this to the serial port of your computer, you can transmit and receive musical data.

      Connectors

      

      Computer Connector

      You can connect a computer to this connector to exchange performance data.

      Use a computer cable (sold separately) to make the connection.

      The type of cable required will depend on your computer.

      Computer Switch

      The setting for this switch is made depending on the computer connected- Mac/PC-1/PC-2.

      When this switch is set to MIDI, this connector cannot be used.

      Making the Connections

      NOTE

      When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other equipment.

      1. Turn off the AT-80SL/60SL and the computer.
      2. Using a compatible computer cable (sold separately), connect the Computer connector on the bottom of the keyboard with the computer's serial port.
      3. Set the computer switch on the underside of the keyboard to match the type of computer connected.

      Please refer to the connection examples below.

      NOTE

      Change the setting of the Computer switch only after the power to the unit is off.

      1. Turn on the computer.
      2. Turn on the AT-80SL/60SL.
      3. Make the settings for baud rate (transmission speed) for the computer and the software.

      

      For more information on this procedure, please refer to the owner's manual for your computer.
      7. You should also make the settings for the MIDI send channel as needed (p. 174).

      Connection Examples:

      Connection with an Apple Macintosh computer

      Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the Computer connector on the AT-80SL/60SL to the modem port (or printer port) on the Apple Macintosh. Set the Computer switch to "Mac."

      When using the Macintosh "Patch Bay" utility, specify 1 MHz as the Interface Type (MIDI Interface Clock).

      

      Connection with an IBM PC

      Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the Computer connector on the AT-80SL/60SL to the COM1 or COM2 serial port on the IBM PC. Set the Computer switch to "PC-2."

      

      Connecting a MIDI Devices

      You can connect between your computer and the MIDI connector of the AT-80SL/60SL using a Roland UM-1 or similar USB MIDI interface cable (sold separately).

      If the AT-80SL/60SL is connected to a computer in which sequencer software such as Roland's "Visual MT" is installed, a song you've recorded on the AT-80SL/60SL can be saved on your computer.

      • In order to make connections to your computer, you must install "MIDI driver" software on your computer. For details, refer to the owner's manual for your MIDI interface.

      Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of the AT-80SL/60SL.

      Set the Computer switch on the AT-80SL/60SL's bottom panel to "MIDI," then turn on the power to the AT-80SL/60SL.

      Connecting MIDI Devices

      By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging performance data, you can control the performances on one device from the other. For instance, you can output sound from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument.

      What's MIDI?

      MIDI, short for "Musical Instrument Digital Interface," was developed as a standard for the exchange of performance data between electronic instruments and computers.

      The AT-80SL/60SL is equipped with MIDI connectors and a Computer connector to let it exchange performance data with external devices. These connectors can be used to connect the AT-80SL/60SL to an external device for even greater versatility.

      About MIDI Connectors

      The AT-80SL/60SL has two kinds of MIDI connectors.

      Connecting these to the MIDI connectors on a MIDI instrument makes it possible for the two instruments to control each other.

      For instance, you can output sound from the other instrument or switch tones on the other instrument.

      You should also set the MIDI send channel as needed.

      MIDI

      
      Out

      
      In

      MIDI Out Connector

      Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector with an optional MIDI cable. The notes played on the keyboard, movements of the Damper pedal, Expression data, data indicating that a Registration button, etc., was pressed will be transmitted to the external MIDI connector. The Solo voice will be transmitted only if the Solo [To Lower] button is ON.

      MIDI In Connector

      Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI out connector with an optional MIDI cable. Performance messages from an external MIDI device are received here.

      These incoming messages may instruct the receiving MIDI instrument to play sounds or switch voices.

      The AT-80SL/60SL contains two sound generators: one sound generator for its own keyboards and one GS sound generator (p. 250). Normally, musical data transmitted from an external device to the MIDI In connector is sent to the GS sound generator, but you can also set the "MIDI IN Mode" parameter (p. 196) so that the keyboard sound generator is controlled.

      Making the Connections

      NOTE

      When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other equipment.

      1. Turn the volume all the way down on the AT80SL/60SL and on the device you're about to connect.
      2. Switch off the power to the AT-80SL/60SL and the device you're about to connect.
      3. Set the Computer switch on the bottom of the unit to "MIDI."
      4. Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the MIDI connectors to each other.
      5. Switch on the power to the AT-80SL/60SL and the connected device.
      6. Adjust the volume level on the AT-80SL/60SL and the connected device.
      7. You should also set the MIDI send channel as needed.

      MEMO

      A separate publication titled "MIDI Implementation" is also available. It provides complete details concerning the way MIDI has been implemented on this unit. If you should require this publication (such as when you intend to carry out byte-level programming), please contact the nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor.

      Connecting a Television to View the Lyrics (AT-80SL)

      You can connect a television to view the lyrics from SMF music files.

      Making the Connections

      NOTE

      When connecting, turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. Failure to follow these steps in the order given could cause a malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other equipment.

      1. Switch off the power to the AT-80SL and television.
      2. Connect the AT-80SL's Video Out connector to the video input connector on the television with an optional video cable.
      3. Switch on the television.
      4. Turn on the AT-80SL.
      5. Touch on the Main screen.

      

      1. Touch <> to display the Video Out.
      2. Touch the Video Out setting to select "ON."

      Each time you touch the Video Out setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

      1. Touch.
      2. Play back the music files with lyric (p. 145).

      The lyric appears on the display.

      NOTE

      If lyric will be not displayed on the screen, please switch the TV format.

      Switching the TV Format

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      

      1. Touch <> <> to display the TV Format.
      2. Touch the TV Format setting to switch between "PAL" and "NTSC."

      Each time you touch the TV Format setting, it will alternate between "PAL" and "NTSC."

      Settings: PAL, NTSC

      1. Touch.

      MEMO

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      Connecting External Speakers or an external Reverb Unit to Broaden the Reverb (RSS Reverb) (AT-80SL)

      The AT-80SL has an Aux Out jack on the bottom of the instrument.

      By using this Aux Out jack to connect external speakers, you can sound the reverb (reverberation) from the speakers. An external reverb unit can also be connected and used to apply reverb.

      Switching the Aux Out On/OFF

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      

      2. Touch <><> to display the Aux Out.

      3. Touch the Aux Out setting to switch between "ON" and "OFF."

      Each time you touch the Aux Out setting, it will alternate between "ON" and "OFF."

      4. Touch.

      Switching the Aux Out Mode

      1. Touch on the Main screen.

      The System screen appears.

      

      2. Touch <> to display the Aux Out Mode.

      3. Touch the Aux Out Mode setting to switch between "AMBIENCE" and "TO EFFECTOR."

      Each time you touch the Aux Out Mode setting, it will alternate between "AMBIENCE" and "TO EFFECTOR."

      AMBIENCE	The reverb sound applied by the ATELIER will be output.
      TO EFFECTOR	The direct sound is output for applying reverb.

      4. Touch.

      

      You can change the depth of Reverb for each part (p. 133).

      

      This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off.

      1. Easy System

      The RSS reverb plays when a stereo set is connected.

      

      

      2. Regular System

      The RSS reverb is played when rear speakers are set up.

      

      

      3. System for Small Hall/Midsized Hall

      The RSS reverb is played when front and rear speakers are set up.

      Aux Out : ON

      Aux Out Mode: AMBIENCE

      

      4. System for Large Hall

      The RSS reverb is played when front, rear, and side speakers are set up.

      Aux Out : ON Aux Out Mode: TO EFFECTOR

      

      Troubleshooting

      If the AT-80SL/60SL does not function in the way you except, first check the following chart. If this does not resolve the problem, consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station.

      Problem	Check	Solution	Page
      When you press the [Power On] switch, the power doesn't come on.	Power cord is not connected correctly.	Connect the power cord correctly.	p. 20
      No sound is heard.	The [Master Volume] slider is set too low.	Turn the [Master Volume] knob toward “Max.”	p. 20
      	Headphones are connected. When you connect the headphones, the sound is heard only through the headphones.	If you want sound to be output from the speakers, disconnect the headphones.	p. 21
      	The plug is still plugged into the headphone jack.	Disconnect the plug from the headphone jack.	p. 21
      	The volume is set too low on the Level [▲] [▼] buttons.	Press the Level [▲][▼] buttons to raise the volume.	p. 52
      	The volume is set too low on the Expression Pedal.	Advance the expression pedal.	p. 120
      	You do not have a Voice selected. Voices that have their button indicator lit can be played.	Press a voice button to select a voice.	p. 40
      No sound is heard. (by the Lower keyboard)	Drums/SFX are selected for the Lower keyboard, but you are playing a key to which no drum sound is assigned.	Turn the Drums/SFX off or play keys to which drums sounds are assigned.	p. 56
      No sound is heard. (by the Upper keyboard)	“Percussion Set 3” has been selected for the Upper keyboard. When “Percussion Set 3” is selected, some keys may have no sound assigned to them.	For the upper keyboard, select a voice other than “Percussion Set 3.”	p. 42
      No sound is heard (when a MIDI instrument is connected).	The power of the connected external devices is not turned on.	Use the correct procedure to turn on the power of the connected external devices.	p. 205 - p. 210
      	The Computer switch on the bottom of the unit is not set to “MIDI.”	Change the setting of the computer switch.	p. 208
      Damper Pedal does not operate.	The damper pedal affects only the Lower keyboard and Upper keyboard. The damper pedal does not affect the Bass pedalboard.	You can change the settings so that the damper pedal affects the Upper keyboard.	p. 187
      	The damper pedal does not affect the Solo voice.	This is not a malfunction.	---
      Expression Pedal does not operate.	The function of the Expression Pedal during recording or the function during playback has been set to “COMPOSER.”	Set the expression pedal function during recording to “PEDAL,” and during playback to “PEDAL” or “PEDAL+COMPOSER.”	p. 186
      Can’t use the function assigned to the foot switch.	If “Regist Shift” (change Registrations) is “RIGHT,” “LEFT,” or “RIGHT + Load Next,” the foot switch will be dedicated to switching the Registration.	Turn “Regist Shift” off.	p. 119
      When the human voice “Jazz Scat” is selected, playing dynamics do not change the sound.	The setting of “Initial Touch” is turned OFF.	Turn “Initial Touch” on.	p. 185
      Rotary effect is not be applied.	Some sounds do not allow the rotary effect to be applied.	This is not a malfunction.	---
      Chorus effect does not apply.	Some sounds do not allow the chorus effect to be applied.	This is not a malfunction.	---
      When you release your fingers from keys in the Lower keyboard while Automatic Accompaniment and Rhythm are playing, the Rhythm performance only remains playing.	Chord Hold is at OFF.	Turn “Chord Hold” on. The Automatic Accompaniment will play while you press a chord. If Chord Hold is turned ON, the Automatic Accompaniment will continue playing with the Rhythm even when you take your hand off of the Lower keyboard.	p. 188
      When you release your fingers from keys in the Lower keyboard, the notes continue sounding.	The Lower Voice [Hold] button is at ON.	Press the Lower Voice [Hold] button to turn it off (dark).	p. 60
      Even though you press only one key, a multiple number of notes sound.	Harmony Intelligence is at ON.	Turn “Harmony Intelligence” off.	p. 122
      	Chord Intelligence is turned ON.	Turn “Chord Intelligence” off.	p. 70
      Sound is produced when you take your finger off a key.	You have selected a “Marimba Treml” or “Banjo Treml” sound.	This is not a malfunction. If you select a “Marimba Treml” or “Banjo Treml” sound, a sound will also be produced when you take your finger off the key.	---
      Automatic Accompaniment sounds odd.	The keys for a chord were not pressed simultaneously.	Either turn on the Chord Intelligence function, or play the chord correctly.	p. 70
      	When Chord Intelligence is OFF, the chord is not being pressed correctly.	Either turn on the Chord Intelligence function, or play the chord correctly.	p. 70
      	When performance data from a device other than the AT-80SL/60SL is being played together with the Automatic Accompaniment, the Automatic Accompaniment may not be sounded correctly.	This is not a malfunction.	---
      Rhythm sounds odd.	When performance data from a device other than the AT-80SL/60SL is being played together with the Automatic Accompaniment, the Rhythm performance may not be sounded correctly.	This is not a malfunction.	---
      Pitch is off	Transpose is in effect.	Simultaneously press the Transpose [-] [+] buttons to cancel the transposition (the Transpose [-][+] buttons' indicators will go out).	p. 114
      	The tuning is incorrect.	Adjust the standard pitch.	p. 194
      	While set for an octave shift, you are playing keys beyond the recommended range. This does not indicate a malfunction.	Adjust the Octave Shift setting.	p. 54
      Recording is not possible.	If you wish to erase a previously-recorded track and then re-record, press the track button for the desired track to make that button blink before you begin recording.	Press the track button for the desired track to make that button indicator blink before you begin recording.	p. 155
      	If you wish to erase a previously-recorded track and then re-record, touch the track button for the track you want to record in the Rec/Play screen, stopping the button from flashing.	On Rec/Play screen, touch the track button for the desired track to make that button indicator blink before you begin recording.	p. 155
      The recorded performance has disappeared.	Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the unit is turned off.	A performance cannot be restored once it's been deleted, so be sure to save it on a floppy disk before you turn off the power.	p. 158
      The bass note of the Automatic Accompaniment does not sound.	When a voice is selected for the Pedal Bass part, the bass of the Automatic Accompaniment will not sound.	This is not a malfunction.	---
      MIDI messages received at MIDI In are not sounded.	The Computer switch is not set to “MIDI” position.	Set the Computer switch to “MIDI.”	p. 208
      	The Computer switch was set to “MIDI” after the power was turned on.	Turn off the power, and then turn the power on once again.	p. 208
      Sound is distorted / cracked.	The Part Balance volume of each part is too high.	Press the Part Balance button to lower the volume.	p. 52
      	The Reverb volume has been raised when the volume of each Part Balance button is already raised.	Either lower the Reverb volume, or adjust the Part Balance of each part.	p. 52 p. 131
      	The [Master Volume] slider has been used to raise the overall volume excessively.	Use the [Master Volume] slider to lower the overall volume.	p. 20
      Some keys (of certain keyboard parts) sound strange.	You are playing notes outside the recommended range of the voice.	This is not a malfunction.	---
      The Rhythm does not change when you press the Registration buttons.	The settings at which Registrations are recalled (Registration Arranger Update) has been set to “DELAYED.”	Set the timing at which the arranger settings are called up (Registration Arranger Update) to “INSTANT.”	p. 92 p. 190
      The volume changes during playback of performance data.	When recording is performed repeatedly while changing the Part Balance volume, the previously-recorded Part Balance data remains in the Control track.	If you wish to get rid of the volume changes, use the Erase function to delete the Part Balance data.	p. 168
      Bass is heard even though you are not playing the Bass Pedalboard.	The Pedal [To Lower] button or the [Bass Split] button is ON. When the Pedal [To Lower] button is ON, the Bass will be sounded by the Lower keyboard.	In the Pedal part, press the Pedal [To Lower] button or [Bass Split] button to turn the button off (dark).	p. 140 p. 142
      When playing the same sound in the Upper keyboard and Lower keyboard, the volume is different.	On one of the keyboards, “Initial Touch” is turned ON.	Set the initial touch settings of the Upper keyboard and the Lower keyboard to both On, or both Off.	p. 185
      Lower keyboard cannot be heard.	The Lower keyboard will not produce sound while an Intro or Ending is being played.	This is not a malfunction.	---
      The sound is not played correctly.	If you layer the same type of sound (for example, Strings 1 and Strings 5), or play an octave-shifted organ sound, the timing at which you play a note or the phase relationship between the two sounds may affect the way in which the sounds are heard, but this is not a malfunction.	You are layering sounds of the same type (e.g., Strings 1 and Strings 5). Alternatively, you are playing an organ sound with Octave Shift. This is not a malfunction.	---
      Can’t play the demo songs.	A floppy disk is inserted in the disk drive.	In order to play the demo song, you must remove the floppy disk from the disk drive.	p. 76
      Nothing appears on screen.	The AT-80SL/60SL uses a liquid-crystal screen, so text may not be displayed when the ambient temperature is below freezing.	Adjust the brightness of the screen.	p. 203
      Lyrics are not indicated properly in the display.	With some music files, the lyrics cannot be displayed correctly.	This is not a malfunction.	---
      	In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.	This is not a malfunction.	---
      	A button was pressed while the lyrics were being shown in the display. During the display of lyrics, you could be taken to a different screen if you press a button.	If you want to have the lyrics be displayed again, touch <Play> on the Rec/Play screen.	p. 143
      The Touch Screen doesn’t respond correctly.	The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced if some time has passed since it was last used	Reposition the Touch screen.	p. 197
      Certain instrument are not heard while playing a song.	The track is muted.	Turn off track muting.	p. 147 p. 148
      Can’t use Chord Intelligence function.	Chord Intelligence is at OFF.	Turn “Chord Intelligence” on.	p. 70
      Score is not indicated properly in the display.	In the Notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed.	This is not a malfunction.	---
      	The Notation display feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation.	This is not a malfunction.	p. 151
      	If you select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will not be displayed in the notation.	Change the part that is displayed.	p. 150
      Vertical lines can be seen in the screen.	This is attributable to the design fundamentals of a liquid crystal display, and does not indicate a malfunction.	Adjusting the display’s contrast can make such lines less noticeable, so you may want to try adjusting it.	p. 203
      The Bass Range Sounds Odd, or There Is a Vibrating Resonance.	Playing at loud volumes may cause instruments near the AT-80SL/60SL to resonate. Resonance can also occur with fluorescent light tubes, glass doors, and other objects. In particular, this problem occurs more easily when the bass component is increased, and when the sound is played at higher volumes.	Use the following measures to suppress such resonance. ·Place speakers so they are 10-15 cm from walls and other surfaces. ·Reduce the volume. ·Move the speakers away from any resonating objects.	---
      	When listening through headphones: Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the AT-80SL/60SL) would be suspect.	Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center.	---
      The volume level of the instrument connected to AT-80SL/60SL is too low.	Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor?	Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.	p. 205
      Pressing the expression pedal while playing back Atelier performance data produces a crackling noise	The expression pedal function is set to “PEDAL+COMPOSER” during playback of Atelier performance data. When this setting is used, moving the expression pedal while playing back Atelier performance data may create a difference between the expression pedal information in the performance data and the volume as set with the expression pedal, which can result in this kind of sound being produced.	Set the expression pedal function to “PEDAL” during playback.	p. 187
      Tempo not changing even when the source tempo is reselected (when arranging rhythms using the Rhythm Customize function).	Auto Std Tempo (Auto Standard Tempo) is set to on. When the Auto Std Tempo setting is set to ON and rhythms are switched while the rhythm is stopped, the tempo is automatically set to the tempo for that rhythm. The tempo setting does not change automatically, even if the rhythms are switched with the Auto Std Tempo setting set to OFF and the rhythm stopped.	Turn “Auto Std Tempo” off.	p. 189
      Unable to save created rhythm to the User Memory	“Memory Full” appears in the display. The available memory remaining in the AT-80SL/60SL is not sufficient.	First delete some other rhythm saved to the user memory, then save the rhythm you have created to the user memory once again.	p. 182 p. 183
      There is no sound from the twelve keys at the right of the lower keyboard.	The V-LINK function is set Mode 2. When V-LINK setting is Mode 2, the group of twelve keys starting at the very right of the lower keyboard are used for controlling video images. Therefore, no sounds are played even when you press these keys.	Turn the V-LINK function off, or select Mode 1 for the V-LINK function.	p. 201

      Error Message

      Error Message	Meanings
      Copy Protected. Can't Save	To protect the copyright, this music file cannot be saved as SMF format.
      	When you want to save as Atelier format, you can save only original disk.
      Can't Save This Song.	You can only play the music data. It cannot be saved on a floppy disk or internal memory.
      Write Protected Disk	The protect tab on the floppy disk is set to the Protect position. Change it to the Write position and repeat the procedure.
      Master Disk	This floppy disk cannot store the format or save any data. Insert a different disk and repeat the procedure.
      Read Only Song. Can't Save	A new song cannot be saved onto this floppy disk.
      No Disk	No floppy disk is connected to the disk drive. Insert the disk correctly, and repeat the procedure.
      Disk Full	There is not sufficient space left on the floppy disk for the data to be saved. Save the data onto a different floppy disk or delete music data on the disk.
      Unknown Disk	The floppy disk inserted into the disk drive cannot be read. Please format the floppy disk.
      Disk Ejected	The floppy disk was removed from the disk drive while loading or writing was in progress. Insert the floppy disk and repeat the procedure.
      Damaged Disk	This floppy disk is damaged and cannot be used. Insert a different disk and repeat the procedure.
      Can't Read	This song cannot be read.
      Can't Play	It cannot be read the floppy disk quickly enough. Press the [Reset] button, then press the [Play/Stop] button to play the song.
      Memory Full	The Rhythm data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded.
      	The performance data is excessively large, and cannot be loaded.
      	Since the internal memory is full, recording or editing is not possible.
      MIDI Buffer Full	The AT-80SL/60SL cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device. Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the AT-80SL/60SL.
      Communication Error	A MIDI cable or computer cable has been disconnected. Connect it properly and suurely.
      Computer I/F Error	The Computer Switch is set to a wrong position or the computer is set wrongly. Switch off the AT-80SL/60SL then set the Computer Switch to the correct position and set the computer correctly. After that, switch on the AT-80SL/60SL again.
      Memory Error	There is something wrong with the system. Repeat the procedure from the beginning.
      Expansion Board Not Found.	An error with the instrument. Please contact Roland Service.
      Internal Memory Near Limit	The AT-80SL/60SL is warning you that its memory will soon become full to capacity, so not much more recording can be done.
      Clear Song OK?	To carry out the procedure, you first need to erase performance data in the AT-80SL/60SL. This message asks you to confirm that you don’t mind doing this. To erase the data, touch <OK> on the screen. When you do not want to erase it, touch <Cancel> then save the data on disk.
      Overwrite Regist OK?	This Registration is already being used. To overwrite the previous Registration data in this memory, touch <OK>. If you decide to keep the previous Registration data in this memory and save your settings in an unused memory, select a number for which “---” is displayed, and then save the data.
      Overwrite Song OK?	There already is performance data having the same name on the disk. To replace the existing data with the new version, touch <OK>. To save it as a separate new file, touch <Cancel> first. Then, after changing the name, save it on disk.
      Overwrite Rhythm OK?	Overwrite the internal Rhythm. To replace the Rhythm, touch <OK>. When you do not want to overwrite it, touch <Cancel> then select another Rhythm.
      Delete Song OK?	Delete the song stored on floppy disk. To delete the song, touch <OK>. When you do not want to delete it, touch <Cancel>.
      Delete Rhythm OK?	Delete the Rhythm. To delete the Rhythm, touch <OK>. When you do not want to delete it, touch <Cancel>.

      Voice List (AT-80SL)

      Organ

      Full Organ1 *1

      Full Organ2 *1

      Full Organ3 *1

      Full Organ4 *1

      Full Organ5 *1

      Full Organ6 *1

      Full Organ7 *1

      Full Organ8 *1

      Full Organ9 *1

      Ballad Organ *1

      GoodOldOrgan *1

      Jazz Organ1 *1

      Jazz Organ2 *1

      Jazz Organ3 *1

      Jazz Organ4 *1

      Jazz Organ5 *1

      Jazz Organ6 *1

      ComboJazzOrg *1

      LightJazzOrg *1

      Rock Organ1

      Rock Organ2

      Lower Organ1 *1

      Lower Organ2 *1

      Lower Organ3 *1

      Lower Organ4 *1

      Lower Organ5 *1

      Lower Organ6 *1

      Manual Bass *1

      Pipe Organ1

      Pipe Organ2

      Pipe Organ3

      Pipe Organ4

      Pipe Organ5

      Pipe Organ6

      Pipe Organ7

      ..

      ..

      AEx Pipe Mix

      AEx PipeOrg

      Diapason 8'

      FluteCeleste

      Gemshorn 8'

      Trompet 8'

      Hautbois 8'

      Viola 8'

      ViolaCeleste

      Bombarde16

      T.ViolCelest *2

      T.String 8' *2

      T.Vox Humana *2

      VoxHumana 8' *2

      T.Tuba 8' *2

      T. Trumpet 8' *2

      T.Sax 8' *2

      T.Oboe 8' *2

      T. Kinura *2

      T.Krumet 8'

      Eng.Horn 8'

      T.ConcertFlt *2

      Tibia 8' *2

      Theater Or.1 *2

      Theater Or.2 *2

      Theater Or.3 *2

      Theater Or.4 *2

      Theater Or.5 *2

      Theater Or.6 *2

      Theater Or.7 *2

      Theater Ens.

      LyricTheater

      TheaterQuint

      ..

      AEx T.Mix

      AEx Theater *2

      Synth.Org.1 *2

      Synth. Org.2

      Synth.Org.3 *2

      Synth. Org.4 *2

      Digi Church *2

      Metallic Org. *2

      Pop. Organ1 *2

      Pop. Organ2 *2

      Pop. Organ3 *2

      Org. Attack1

      Org. Attack2

      Org. Attack3

      Org. Attack4

      Org. Click

      ■ Strings

      Full Strings *2

      Full Tremolo *2

      Str/Spiccato *2

      Chamber Str *2

      ChamberStr2 *2

      Orch.Str.Ens *2

      Strings1

      Strings2

      Strings3 *2

      Strings4 *2

      Strings5

      Strings6

      Strings7 *2

      Strings8 *2

      Rich Pizz. *2

      Pizzicato *2

      Mellow Pizz. *2

      ..

      AEx Strings

      AEx Str+Trml *2

      ExStr+Brs

      AEx Str+Chr

      Slow FullStr *2

      Slow Str.1

      Slow Str.2

      Slow Str.3 *2

      Synth. Str.1

      Synth. Str.2

      Synth. Str.3

      Violin *2

      AEx Violin *2

      Viola *2

      Cello *2

      Cello 2 *2

      Er Hu *2

      Human Voice

      JazzScat *2

      JazzScat2

      JazzScat3

      DreamyChoir *2

      F.Chorus Luh *2

      F.Chorus Who *2

      Jazz Doo *2

      Jazz Doot *2

      Jazz Dat *2

      Jazz Bap *2

      Jazz DowFall *2

      Jazz DoohDot *2

      Jazz DahDat *2

      Jazz Vaaah *2

      Jazz Doea *2

      Pop Voice *2

      AEx M.Chorus *2

      AEx F.Chorus *2

      Soprano *2

      Soprano 2

      Tenor

      Tenor&Sop.

      Classical

      Boys Choir

      BoysChoir2 *2

      Kids Choir *2

      Gregorian

      Gospel

      Choir

      Female 1

      Female 2 *2

      AExChoir

      Synth. ChoiR

      Synth. Voice *2

      Space Voice

      Choir Chord

      Vocal Menu

      Oriental Chr *2

      Harp *2

      Harp 2 *2

      Celtic Harp *2

      Nylon Harp *2

      Harpvox *2

      Koto *2

      Taisho Koto *2

      Shamisen *2

      Sanshin *2

      Chung Ruan *2

      Pi Pa *2

      Sitar *2

      HarmonMuteTp *2

      Cup Mute Tp. *2

      Mute Trumpet *2

      MuteTrumpet2 *2

      AEx Trumpet *2

      Flugel Horn *2

      Trombone Solo *2

      Trombone *2

      Trombone2 *2

      F.Horn Solo1 *2

      F.Horn Solo2 *2

      Soprano Sax *2

      Soprano Sax2 *2

      Alto Sax Ex *2

      Alto Sax *2

      Alto Sax2 *2

      Blow Sax *2

      AEx AltoSax *2

      Super Tenor *2

      Tenor Sax *2

      Tenor Sax2 *2

      BaritoneSax *2

      ■ Woodwinds

      Wood Winds *2

      Wood Winds 2 *2

      AEx Woodwind *2

      Flute *2

      Flute2 *2

      Flute3 *2

      AEx Flute *2

      Piccolo *2

      Synth.Flute

      Oboe Solo *2

      Oboe *2

      AEx Oboe *2

      English Horn *2

      Bassoon *2

      Bassoon 2 *2

      ClarithetSolo *2

      Clarithet *2

      Clarithet2 *2

      Clarithet3 *2

      Clarithet4 *2

      Bs Clarinet *2

      Shakuhachi *2

      Qu Di *2

      Pan Flute *2

      Pan Flute 2 *2

      Tin Whistle *2

      Uillean Pipe *2

      Bagpipe *2

      BottleBlow *2

      Piano

      Grand Piano

      Bright Piano

      Piano1

      Piano2

      Piano3

      ..

      Honky-tonk

      Honky-tonk2

      Stage Rhodes *2

      Dyno Rhodes *2

      Wurly *2

      E.Piano1

      E.Piano2

      E.Piano3

      E.Piano4 *2

      ..

      AEx EP+Str

      HarpsiSingle *3

      HarpsiDouble *3

      Harpsichord

      Clavi.

      Guitar

      Nylon-str.Gt *2

      Nylon Gt.2 *2

      Fl.Guitar *2

      Fl.Gtr Roll *2

      Requinto Gtr *2

      Ac.Gtr Sld *2

      Ac.Gtr Hrm *2

      Steel-str.Gt *2

      12strGuitar *2

      .

      AEx Gtr+Str *2

      SemAc.Guitar *2

      JazzGuitar *2

      CleanGuitar *2

      JC E.Guitar *2

      Lp Overdrive *2

      Overdrive Gt *2

      DistortionGt *2

      PowerGuitar *2

      Rock Rhythm *2

      MutedGuitar *2

      ..

      AEx OD Gtr *2

      Hawaiian Gt. *2

      Pedal Steel *2

      Banjo *2

      Banjo Treml *3

      Mandolin

      Brass/Sax

      BrassSect.1 *2

      BrassSect.2

      Brass 1 *2

      Brass 2 *2

      Brass 3

      Orch.Tutti 1 *2

      Orch.Tutti 2 *2

      Orch.Tutti 3 *2

      Orch.Brs Ens *2

      Quad Brass *2

      Power Brass *2

      FatPop Brass *2

      Brass Fall *2

      AExOrch.Brs *2

      AEx Brass *2

      AEx BigBand *2

      Twin Tp. *2

      Tp. Section *2

      Trumpet Fall *2

      Twin Bones *2

      Bones Sect. *2

      Fr.Horn Sect

      Fr.HornSect2

      Fr.HornSect3

      Fr.HornSect4 *2

      MutedFr.Horn *2

      AEx Fr.Horn *2

      Sax.Section *2

      Sax.Section2 *2

      Sax.Section3 *2

      Sax/Brass

      Sax&Clarithet *2

      Synth.Brass *2

      Trumpet Solo *2

      Trumpet *2

      Trumpet2 *2

      Trumpet3

      Tp/Shake *2

      Mariachi Tp. *2

      HumanWhistle	*2		ContraBs Oct	*2	Marimba
      Lead/Pad			ContraBs+SD	*2	MarimbaTreml	*3
      		.	AEx Bs+Temp		Xylophone
      Synth. Lead1	*2	.	AEx Bs+Tuba	*2	Balafon	*2
      Synth. Lead2	*2		Tuba		Steel Drums
      Synth. Lead3	*2		Tuba2	*2	Steel Drums2	*2
      Synth. Lead4	*2		Tuba3	*2	Yang Qin	*2
      Synth. Lead5	*2		E.Bass1		Santur	*2
      Retro Lead	*2		E.Bass2	*2	Kalimba	*2
      JP SuperSaw	*2		E.Bass3	*2	Music Box	*2
      CC Solo	*2		E.Bass4	*2	SoftMusicBox	*2
      AEx Lead	*2		E.Bass5	*2	Vibra Bells	*2
      Synth. Pad1			E.Bass Oct	*2	Digi Bells	*2
      Synth. Pad2			Power Bass	*2	Finger Snap
      Synth. Pad3			Synth. Bass1		Footsteps
      OB Pad	*2		Synth. Bass2		Key Typing
      Soft Pad	*2		Voice Thum	*2	Bird	*2
      Mystic Str.	*2		■ Percussion		■ AEx Voice
      Crystal Pad	*2
      Polar Night	*2		Timpani		.	AEx Pipe Mix
      Space Pad	*2		Timpani2		.	AEx PipeOrg
      Galactic	*2		Soft Timpani		.	AEx T.Mix
      Sugar Key	*2		AEx TimpRoll	*2	.	AEx Theater
      HollowReleases	*2		Concert Cym.	*2	.	AEx Strings
      AEx GlassPad	*2		Short Cymbal		.	AEx Str+Trml
      Acco.Classic	*2		MalletCymRol		.	AEx Str+Brs
      Fr.Musette	*2		Crash Cymbal	*2	.	AEx Str+Chr
      German Acco.	*2		Ride Cymbal		.	AEx Violin
      Italian Folk	*2		Snare & Roll		.	AEx M.Chorus
      Accordion			Snare Drum		.	AEx F.Chorus
      AEx Acordion	*2		Bass Drum		.	AEx Choir
      BandoneonFul	*2		Triangle	*2	.	AEx PianoStr
      Bandoneon	*2		Tambourine		.	AEx EP+Str
      Blues Harp	*2		TambourinRol		.	AEx Gtr+Str
      Harmonica	*2		Woodblock		.	AEx OD Gtr
      			Woodblock 2	*2	.	AEx Orch.Brts
      			Castanet		.	AEx Brass
      Bass			Jingle Bell	*2	.	AEx BigBand
      Organ Bass1			Church Bell		.	AEx Fr.Horn
      Organ Bass2					.	AEx Trumpet
      PedalOrg.16'	*1		Perc. Set1		.	AEx AltoSax
      Pedal Org.8'	*1		Perc. Set2		.	AEx Woodwind
      Pipe Org. Bs			Perc. Set3	*2	.	AEx笛
      Bombarde			Orch.HitMenu		.	AEx Oboe
      Theater Bass			DanceHitMenu		.	AEx Lead
      Str.Bass Pdl	*2		AcGtNzMenu		.	AEx Aces
      String Bass	*2		Jazz Vibes	*2	.	AEx GlassPad
      String Bass2	*2		Vibraphone	*2	.	AEx Acordion
      Str.Bass Oct	*2		Glockenspiel		.	AEx Bs+Temp
      Str.BassSolo	*2		Celesta		.	AEx Bs+Tuba
      Bass+Cymbal	*2		Organ Harp		.	AEx TimpRoll
      Baby Bass	*2		Organ Bell		* The AEx voice group consists of all the AEx voices, taken from the entire collection of voices.
      Contrabass1	*2		Tubular-bell
      Contrabass2	*2		Hand Bell	*2

      *1: Rotary: effective, Chorus: ineffective

      *2: Vibrato: effective, Aftertouch: effective

      Active Expression Voice

      Voice List (AT-60SL)

      Organ

      Full Organ1 *1

      Full Organ2 *1

      Full Organ3 *1

      Full Organ4 *1

      Full Organ5 *1

      Full Organ6 *1

      Full Organ7 *1

      Full Organ8 *1

      Ballad Organ *1

      Jazz Organ1 *1

      Jazz Organ2 *1

      Jazz Organ3 *1

      Jazz Organ4 *1

      Jazz Organ5 *1

      Jazz Organ6 *1

      ComboJazzOrg *1

      Rock Organ1

      Rock Organ2

      Lower Organ1 *1

      Lower Organ2 *1

      Lower Organ3 *1

      Lower Organ4 *1

      Lower Organ5 *1

      Lower Organ6 *1

      Manual Bass *1

      ..

      AEx Pipe Mix

      Pipe Organ1

      Pipe Organ2

      Pipe Organ3

      Pipe Organ4

      Pipe Organ5

      Pipe Organ6

      Pipe Organ7

      AEx Pipe Mix

      AEx PipeOrg

      Diapason 8'

      FluteCeleste

      Gemshorn 8

      Trompet 8'

      Hautbois 8'

      Viola 8'

      ViolaCeleste

      Bombarde16

      T.String 8' *2

      VoxHumana 8' *2

      T.Tuba 8' *2

      T. Trumpet 8' *2

      T.Sax 8' *2

      T.Oboe 8' *2

      T.Krumet 8'

      Eng.Horn 8'

      Tibia 8' *2

      Theater Or.1 *2

      Theater Or.2 *2

      Theater Or.3 *2

      Theater Or.4 *2

      Theater Or.5 *2

      Theater Or.6 *2

      Theater Or.7 *2

      AEx Theater *2

      Synth.Org.1 *2

      Synth. Org.2

      Synth. Org.3 *2

      Synth.Org.4 *2

      Pop. Organ1 *2

      Pop. Organ2 *2

      Pop. Organ3 *2

      Org. Attack1

      Org. Attack2

      Org. Attack3

      Org. Attack4

      Org. Click

      ■ Strings

      Chamber Str *2

      Orch.Str.Ens *2

      Strings1

      Strings2

      Strings3 *2

      Strings4 *2

      Strings5

      Strings6

      Strings7 *2

      Strings8 *2

      Pizzicato *2

      Mellow Pizz. *2

      AEx Stri

      AEx Str

      AExStr+Chr

      Slow Str.1

      Slow Str.2

      Slow Str.3 *2

      Synth. Str.1

      Synth. Str.2

      Synth. Str.3

      Violin *2

      ..

      AEx Violin *2

      Viola

      Cello

      Er Hu

      *2

      *2

      *2

      *2

      Human Voice

      JazzScat *2

      Dreamy Choi *2

      Jazz Doo *2

      Jazz Doot *2

      Jazz Dat *2

      Jazz Bap *2

      Jazz DowFall *2

      Pop Voice *2

      Soprano 2

      Classical

      Boys Choir

      KidsChoir *2

      Gregorian

      Gospel

      Choir

      Female 2 *2

      ..

      AExChoir

      Synth. ChoiR

      Synth. Voice *2

      Space Voice

      Vocal Menu

      Piano

      Grand Piano

      Piano1

      Piano2

      Piano3

      ..

      AEx PianoStr

      Honky-tonk

      Honky-tonk2

      Stage Rhodes *2

      Dyno Rhodes *2

      E.Piano1

      E.Piano2

      E.Piano3

      E.Piano4 *2

      ..

      AEx EP+Str

      Harpsichord

      Clavi.

      Guitar

      Nylon-str.Gt *2

      Nylon Gt.2 *2

      RequintoGtr *2

      Ac.Gtr Sld *2

      Steel-str.Gt *2

      12strGuitar *2

      AEx Gtr+Str *2

      SemAc.Guitar *2

      JazzGuitar *2

      CleanGuitar *2

      JC E.Guitar *2

      Overdrive Gt *2

      DistortionGt *2

      MutedGuitar *2

      Hawaiian Gt. *2

      Banjo *2

      Banjo Treml *3

      Mandolin

      Harp *2

      Harp 2 *2

      Harpvox *2

      Koto *2

      Taisho Koto *2

      Shamisen *2

      Sitar *2

      Brass/Sax

      BrassSect.1 *2

      Brass2 *2

      Orch.Tutti 1 *2

      Orch.Tutti 2 *2

      Orch.Brs Ens *2

      Quad Brass *2

      Power Brass *2

      Brass Fall *2

      AEx Brass *2

      Twin Tp. *2

      Tp. Section *2

      Twin Bones *2

      Fr.Horn Sect

      Fr.HornSect2

      Fr.HornSect3

      Sax.Section *2

      Sax.Section2 *2

      Sax.Section3 *2

      Sax/Brass

      Synth.Brass *2

      Trumpet *2

      Trumpet2 *2

      Tp/Shake *2

      Mariachi Tp. *2

      Cup Mute Tp. *2

      Mute Trumpet *2

      MuteTrumpet2 *2

      Flugel Horn *2

      Trombone *2

      Trombone2 *2

      F.Horn Solo1 *2

      F.Horn Solo2 *2

      Soprano Sax *2

      Soprano Sax2 *2

      Alto Sax Ex *2

      Alto Sax *2

      Alto Sax2 *2

      Blow Sax *2

      AExAltoSax *2

      Super Tenor *2

      Tenor Sax *2

      Tenor Sax2 *2

      ■ Woodwinds

      Wood Winds *2

      Flute *2

      Flute2 *2

      Flute3 *2

      AEx Flute *2

      Piccolo *2

      Synth.Flute

      Oboe *2

      English Horn *2

      Bassoon *2

      Clarithet *2

      Clarithet2 *2

      Clarithet3 *2

      Clarithet4 *2

      Bs Clarinet *2

      Shakuhachi *2

      Qu Di *2

      Pan Flute *2

      Pan Flute 2 *2

      Bagpipe *2

      HumanWhistle *2

      Lead/Pad

      Synth. Lead1 *2

      Synth. Lead2 *2

      Synth. Lead3 *2

      Synth. Lead4 *2

      Synth. Lead5 *2

      JP SuperSaw *2

      Synth. Pad1

      Synth. Pad2

      Sugar Key *2

      HollowReleases *2

      Acco.Classic *2

      Accordion

      Bandoneon *2

      Harmonica *2

      Bass

      Organ Bass1

      Organ Bass2

      Pipe Org. Bs

      Bombarde

      Theater Bass

      Str.Bass Pdl *2

      String Bass *2

      String Bass2 *2

      Str.Bass Oct

      Bass+Cymbal *2

      Contrabass1 *2

      Contrabass2 *2

      ContraBs Oct *2

      AEx Bs+Timp

      Tuba

      Tuba2 *2

      Tuba3 *2

      E.Bass1

      E.Bass2 *2

      E.Bass3 *2

      E.Bass4 *2

      E.Bass Oct *2

      Synth. Bass1

      Synth. Bass2

      Voice Thum *2

      ■ Percussion

      Timpani

      *1: Rotary: effective, Chorus: ineffective

      *2: VIbrato: effective, Aftertouch: effective

      :ActiveExpressionVoice

      Timpani2

      Short Cymbal

      MalletCymRol

      Crash Cymbal *2

      Ride Cymbal

      Snare Drum

      Bass Drum

      Triangle *2

      Tambourine

      Woodblock

      Woodblock 2 *2

      Jingle Bell *2

      Church Bell

      Perc. Set1

      Perc. Set2

      Perc.Set3 *2

      Orch.HitMenu

      Vibraphone *2

      Glockenspiel

      Celesta

      Organ Harp

      Organ Bell

      Tubular-bell

      Marimba

      MarimbaTreml *3

      Xylophone

      Steel Drums

      Santur *2

      Kalimba *2

      Music Box *2

      Vibra Bells *2

      Finger Snap

      Bird *2

      AEx Voice

      AEx Pipe Mix

      AEx PipeOrg

      AEx Theater *2

      Ex Strings

      AExStr+Brs

      AEx Str+Chr

      AEx Violin *2

      AExChoir

      AEx PianoStr

      AEx EP+Str

      AExGtr+Str *2

      AEx Brass *2

      AEx AltoSax *2

      AEx Flute *2

      AEx Bs+Timp

      • The AEx voice group consists of all the AEx voices, taken from the entire collection of voices.

      Drums/SFX Set List (AT-80SL)

      	POP		R&B		ROCK		JAZZ BRUSH		HIP HOP
      28	707 Claps		707 Claps		707 Claps		707 Claps		Slap
      29	Hand Clap 1A	[EXC7]	Hand Clap 1A		Hand Clap 1A	[EXC7]	Hand Clap 1A	[EXC7]	Scratch Push
      30	Hand Clap 2	[EXC7]	Hand Clap 2		Hand Clap 2	[EXC7]	Hand Clap 2	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull
      31	Hand Clap 1B	Hand Clap 1B	Hand Clap 1B		Hand Clap 1B	Hand Clap 1B	Hand Clap 1B	[EXC1]	Sticks
      32	Pop Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Pop Pedal HH		Rk Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Pop Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Square Click
      33	Gospel Clap		Gospel Clap				Gospel Clap		Metro.Click1
      34	SD Roll		SD Roll				SD Roll		Metro.Bell1
      35	Pop BD B		Pop BD B		Rk BD B		Rk BD B		808 BD 2B
      36	Pop BD A		Pop BD A		Rk BD A		Pop BD A		808 BD 2A
      37	Pop Rim Shot		Pop Rim Shot		Rk Rim ShotA		Jz SD Sweep1		808 Rim Shot
      38	Pop SD 1		R&D SD A		Rk SD 1A		Jz SD A		Dnc SD 2A
      39	Pop SD Flm B		Pop SD Flm B		Rk SD Flm		Jz SD Sweep2		Hand Clap 1
      40	Pop SD 2		Pop SD 3E		Rk SD 1E		Jz SD B		Dnc SD 2B
      41	Pop LwTomFlm		Pop LwTomFlm		Rk LwTom Flm		Jz LwTom Flm		Lw Tom 1
      42	Pop CloseHH1	[EXC1]	Pop CloseHH1	[EXC1]	Rk CloseHH 1	[EXC1]	Pop CloseHH1	[EXC1]	808CloseHH A	[EXC1]
      43	Pop Lw Tom		Pop Lw Tom		Rk Lw Tom		Jz Lw Tom		Lw Tom 2
      44	Pop CloseHH2	[EXC1]	Pop CloseHH2	[EXC1]	Rk CloseHH 2	[EXC1]	Pop CloseHH2	[EXC1]	808CloseHH B	[EXC1]
      45	Pop MdTomFlm		Pop MdTomFlm		Rk MdTom Flm		Jz MdTom Flm		Md Tom 1
      46	Pop Open HH	[EXC1]	Pop Open HH	[EXC1]	Rk Open HH	[EXC1]	Pop Open HH	[EXC1]	808 Open HH	[EXC1]
      47	Pop Md Tom		Pop Md Tom		Rk Md Tom		Jz Md Tom		Md Tom 2
      C3	Pop HiTomFlm		Pop HiTomFlm		Rk HiTom Flm		Jz HiTom Flm		Hi Tom 1
      48	PopCrashCym1		Pop ChinaCym		PopCrashCym1		Jz CrashCym1		Crash Cym 1
      50	Pop Hi Tom		Pop Hi Tom		Rk Hi Tom		Jz Hi Tom		Hi Tom 2
      51	PopRideCym1A		PopRideCym1A		Rk RideCym 1		Jz RideCym 1		Ride Cym 1
      52	Pop ChinaCym		PopCrashCym1		Pop ChinaCym		Jz China Cym		Reverse Cym
      53	PopRideBell		PopRideBell		PopRideBell		Jz RideCym 2		Ride Bell
      54	Tambourine 2		Tambourine 2		Tambourine 2		Tambourine 2		TambourinShk
      55	Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym
      56	ChaChaCowbel		ChaChaCowbel		ChaChaCowbel		ChaChaCowbel		808 Cowbell
      57	PopCrashCym2		PopCrashCym2		China Cym		Jz CrashCym2		Crash Cym 2
      58	Vibra-Slap 2		Vibra-Slap 2		Vibra-Slap 2		Vibra-Slap 2		Vibra-Slap 1
      59	PopRideCym2		PopRideCym1B		PopRideCym1B		PopRideCym2		Ride Cym 2
      C4	Hi Bongo 2		Hi Bongo 2		Hi Bongo 2		Hi Bongo 2		Hi Bongo 1
      60	LW Bongo 2		LW Bongo 2		LW Bongo 2		LW Bongo 2		LW Bongo 1
      61	Hi CongaSlap		Hi CongaSlap		Hi Conga Slap		Hi Conga Slap		Hi CongaMute
      62	Hi Conga 2		Hi Conga 2		Hi Conga 2		Hi Conga 2		Hi Conga 1
      63	LW Conga 2		LW Conga 2		LW Conga 2		LW Conga 2		LW Conga 2
      64	Hi Timbale 2		Hi Timbale 2		Hi Timbale 2		Hi Timbale 2		Hi Timbale 1
      65	LW Timbale 2		LW Timbale 2		LW Timbale 2		LW Timbale 2		LW Timbale 1
      66	Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo
      67	LW Agogo		LW Agogo		LW Agogo		LW Agogo		LW Agogo
      68	Shaker 2		Shaker 2		Shaker 2		Shaker 2		Cabasa
      70	Shaker 3		Shaker 3		Shaker 3		Shaker 3		Maracas
      71	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]
      C5	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]
      72	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]
      73	Long Guiro		Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]
      74	Claves		Claves		Claves		Claves		808 Claves
      75	Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock
      76	LW WoodBlock		LW WoodBlock		LW WoodBlock		LW WoodBlock		LW WoodBlock
      77	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]
      78	Open Cuica		Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]
      79	Open Triangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]
      80	Open Triangle		Open Triangle		Open Triangle		Open Triangle		Open Triangle
      81	Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1
      82	Shaker 2		Shaker 2		Shaker 2		Shaker 2		Shaker 1
      83	Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell
      C6	Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree
      84	Castanets		Castanets		Castanets		Castanets		Castanets
      85	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]
      86	Open Surdo		Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]
      87	Cana		Cana		Cana		Cana		Applause
      88	HiTimbaleFlm		HiTimbaleFlm		HiTimbaleFlm		HiTimbaleFlm		Dnc SD 2C
      89	LoTimbaleFlm		LoTimbaleFlm		LoTimbaleFlm		LoTimbaleFlm		Dnc SD 2D
      90	HiTimbalePhr		HiTimbalePhr		HiTimbalePhr		HiTimbalePhr		Dnc SD 1A
      91	Shekere 1		Shekere 1		Shekere 1		Shekere 1		Rm SD 1A
      92	Shekere 2		Shekere 2		Shekere 2		Shekere 2		Std2 SD 1
      93	LW BongoMute		LW BongoMute		LW BongoMute		LW BongoMute		Rm SD 1B
      94	Hi BongoMute		Hi BongoMute		Hi BongoMute		Hi BongoMute		Std SD 1A
      95	......		......		......		......		Std SD 1B
      96	......		......		......		......		......
      97	......		......		......		......		......
      98	......		......		......		......		......
      99	......		......		......		......		......
      100	FlamencClapL		FlamencClapL		FlamencClapL		FlamencClapL		......
      101	FlamencClapR		FlamencClapR		FlamencClapR		FlamencClapR		......
      102	BongoCowbelA		BongoCowbelA		BongoCowbelA		BongoCowbelA		......
      103	......		......		......		......		......

      ---: no sound

      [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number

      	VOX DRUM		JAZZ STANDARD		STANDARD 2		ROOM		ROOM 2
      28	707 Claps		Slap		Slap		Slap		Slap
      29	Hand Clap 1A	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]
      30	Hand Clap 2	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]
      31	Hand Clap 1B		Sticks		Sticks		Sticks		Sticks
      32	Pop Pedal HH		Square Click		Square Click		Square Click		Square Click
      33	Gospel Clap		Metro.Check1		Metro.Check1		Metro.Check1		Metro.Check1
      34	Vox Dut		Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1
      35	Vox Dom		Std BD 2		Std BD 2		Std BD 2		Std BD 2
      C2	Vox Trush		Std BD 1		Std2 BD 1		Std BD 1		Rm BD
      36	Vox Hehho		Rim Shot		Rim Shot		Rim Shot		Rim Shot
      37	Vox Doyear		Std SD 1		Std2 SD 1		Std SD 1		Rm SD 1
      38	Vox Thu		Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1
      39	Vox That		Std SD 2		Std2 SD 2		Std SD 2		Std2 SD 1
      40	Vox Aahhh		Lw Tom 2		Lw Tom 2		Rm Lw Tom 2		Rm Lw Tom 2
      41	Vox Tu		Std Close HH	[EXC1]	Std2 CloseHH	[EXC1]	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	Std2 CloseHH	[EXC1]
      42	Vox Dooh		Lw Tom 1		Lw Tom 1		Rm Lw Tom 1		Rm Lw Tom 1
      43	Vox Ptu		Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Std2 PedalHH	[EXC1]	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Std2 PedalHH	[EXC1]
      44	Vox Down		Md Tom 2		Md Tom 2		Rm Md Tom 2		Rm Md Tom 2
      45	Vox Pa		Std Open HH	[EXC1]	Std2 Open HH	[EXC1]	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	Std2 Open HH	[EXC1]
      46	Vox Bom		Md Tom 1		Md Tom 1		Rm Md Tom 1		Rm Md Tom 1
      C3	Vox Toear		Hi Tom 2		Hi Tom 2		Rm Hi Tom 2		Rm Hi Tom 2
      48	Vox Aahhu		Crash Cym 1		Crash Cym 1		Crash Cym 1		Crash Cym 1
      50	Vox Toya		Hi Tom 1		Hi Tom 1		Rm Hi Tom 1		Rm Hi Tom 1
      51	Vox Thuh		Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1
      52	Vox Cheey		China Cym		China Cym		China Cym		China Cym
      53	Vox Cymm		Ride Bell		Ride Bell		Ride Bell		Ride Bell
      54	Vox Tub		Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1
      55	Vox Pruru		Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym
      56	Vox Tut		Cowbell		Cowbell		Cowbell		Cowbell
      57	Vox Tyun		Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2
      58	Vox Tdum		Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1
      59	Vox Afahhh		Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2
      C4	Hi Bongo 2		Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1
      60	Lw Bongo 2		Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1
      61	Hi CongaSlap		Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute
      62	Hi Conga 2		Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1
      63	Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2
      64	Hi Timbale 2		Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1
      65	Lw Timbale 2		Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1
      66	Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo
      67	Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo
      68	Shaker 2		Cabasa		Cabasa		Cabasa		Cabasa
      70	Shaker 3		Maracas		Maracas		Maracas		Maracas
      71	Short Whistle	[EXC2]	Short Whistle	[EXC2]	Short Whistle	[EXC2]	Short Whistle	[EXC2]	Short Whistle	[EXC2]
      72	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]
      73	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]
      74	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]
      75	Claves		Claves		Claves		Claves		Claves
      76	Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock
      77	Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock
      78	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]
      79	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]
      80	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]
      81	Open Triangle	[EXC5]	Open Triangle	[EXC5]	Open Triangle	[EXC5]	Open Triangle	[EXC5]	Open Triangle	[EXC5]
      82	Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1
      83	Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell
      C6	Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree
      84	Castanets		Castanets		Castanets		Castanets		Castanets
      85	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]
      86	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]
      87	Cana		----		----		----		----
      88	HiTimbaleFIm		----		----		----		----
      89	LoTimbaleFIm		----		----		----		----
      90	HiTimbalePhr		----		----		----		----
      91	Shakee 1		----		----		----		----
      92	Shakee 2		----		----		----		----
      93	LW BongoMute		----		----		----		----
      94	Hi BongoMute		----		----		----		----
      95	----

      ---: no sound

      [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number

      	POWER		ELECTRONIC		TR-808		DANCE
      28	Slap		Slap		Slap		SSlap
      29	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]
      30	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]
      31	Sticks		Sticks		Sticks		Dnc SD 1
      32	Square Click		Square Click		Square Click		Square Click
      33	Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1
      34	Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1
      35	Std BD 2		Std BD 2		Std BD 2		Std2 BD 1
      36	Pwr BD		Elec BD		808 BD 1		808 BD 2A
      37	Rim Shot		Rim Shot		808 Rim Shot		808 Rim Shot
      38	Gated SD		Elec SD		808 SD		909 SD
      39	Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1
      40	Std SD 2		Gated SD		Std SD 2		Dnc SD 2B
      41	Rm Lw Tom 2		Elec LwTom 2		808 LwTom 2		808 LwTom 2
      42	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	808CloseHH A	[EXC1]	808CloseHH A	[EXC1]
      43	Rm Lw Tom 1		Elec LwTom 1		808 LwTom 1		808 LwTom 1
      44	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	808CloseHH B	[EXC1]	808CloseHH B	[EXC1]
      45	Rm Md Tom 2		Elec MdTom 2		808 MdTom 2		808 MdTom 2
      46	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	808 Open HH	[EXC1]	808 Open HH	[EXC1]
      47	Rm Md Tom 1		Elec MdTom 1		808 MdTom 1		808 MdTom 1
      48	Rm Hi Tom 2		Elec HiTom 2		808 Hi Tom 2		808 Hi Tom 2
      49	Crash Cym 1		Crash Cym 1		808 Cym		808 Cym
      50	Rm Hi Tom 1		Elec HiTom 1		808 Hi Tom 1		808 Hi Tom 1
      51	Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1
      52	China Cym		Reverse Cym		China Cym		China Cym
      53	Ride Bell		Ride Bell		Ride Bell		Ride Bell
      54	Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1
      55	Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym
      56	Cowbell		Cowbell		Cowbell		Cowbell
      57	Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2
      58	Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1
      59	Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2
      60	Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1
      61	Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1
      62	Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute		808 Hi Conga		808 Hi Conga
      63	Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1		808 McDConga		808 McDConga
      64	Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2		808 LwConga		808 LwConga
      65	Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1
      66	Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1
      67	Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo
      68	Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo
      69	Cabasa		Cabasa		Cabasa		Cabasa
      70	Maracas		Maracas		808 Maracas		808 Maracas
      71	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]
      72	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]
      73	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]
      74	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]
      75	Claves		Claves		808 Claves		808 Claves
      76	Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock
      77	Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock
      78	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]
      79	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]
      80	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]
      81	Open Triangle	[EXC5]	Open Triangle	[EXC5]	Open Triangle	[EXC5]	Open Triangle	[EXC5]
      82	Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1
      83	Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell
      C6	Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree
      84	Castanets		Castanets		Castanets		Castanets
      85	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]
      86	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]
      87	-----		-----		-----		-----
      88	-----		-----		-----		-----
      89	-----		-----		-----		-----
      90	-----		-----		-----		-----
      91	-----		-----		-----		-----
      92	-----		-----		-----		-----
      93	-----		-----		-----		-----
      94	-----		-----		-----		-----
      95	-----		-----		-----		-----
      C7	-----		-----		-----		-----
      96	-----		-----		-----		-----
      97	-----		-----		-----		-----
      98	-----		-----		-----		-----
      99	-----		-----		-----		-----
      100	-----		-----		-----		-----
      101	-----		-----		-----		-----
      102	-----		-----		-----		-----
      103	-----		-----		-----		-----

      ---: no sound

      [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number

      	BRUSH		BRUSH 2		ORCHESTRA		SOUND EFFECT
      28	Slap		Slap		Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	----
      29	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	----
      30	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Ride Cym 1		----
      31	Sticks		Sticks		Sticks		----
      32	Square Click		Square Click		Square Click		----
      33	Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1		----
      34	Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		----
      35	Bsh BD 2		Bsh BD 2		Concert BD 2		----
      36	Bsh BD 1		Std2 BD 1		Concert BD 1		----
      37	Rim Shot		Rim Shot		Rim Shot		----
      38	Bsh Tap		Bsh Tap		Concert SD A		----
      39	Bsh Slap		Bsh Slap		Castanets		High Q
      40	Bsh Sweep		Bsh Sweep		Concert SD B		Slap
      41	Lw Tom 2		Bsh Lw Tom 2		Timpani F		Scratch Push [EXC7]
      42	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	Timpani F#		Scratch Pull [EXC7]
      43	Lw Tom 1		Bsh Lw Tom 1		Timpani G		Sticks
      44	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Timpani G#		Square Click
      45	Md Tom 2		Bsh Md Tom 2		Timpani A		Metronome Click
      46	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	Timpani A#		Metronome Bell
      47	Md Tom 1		Bsh Md Tom 1		Timpani B		Guitar sliding Finger
      48	Hi Tom 2		Bsh Hi Tom 2		Timpani c		Guitar cutting noise (down)
      49	Crash Cym 1		Crash Cym 1		Timpani c#		Guitar cutting noise (up)
      50	Hi Tom 1		Bsh Hi Tom 1		Timpani d		String slap of double bass
      51	Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1		Timpani d#		FI.Key Click
      52	China Cym		China Cym		Timpani e		Laughing
      53	Ride Bell		Ride Bell		Timpani f		Screaming
      54	Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Punch
      55	Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Heart Beat
      56	Cowbell		Cowbell		Cowbell		Footsteps1
      57	Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2		ConcertCym 2		Footsteps2
      58	Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Applause
      59	Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2		ConcertCym 1		Door Creaking
      60	Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Door
      61	Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Scratch
      62	Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute		Wind Chimes
      63	Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1		Car-Engine
      64	Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2		Car-Stop
      65	Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Car-Pass
      66	Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Car-Crash
      67	Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Siren
      68	Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Train
      69	Cabasa		Cabasa		Cabasa		Jetplane
      70	Maracas		Maracas		Maracas		Helicopter
      71	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	Starship
      72	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Gun Shot
      73	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Machine Gun
      74	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Lasergun
      75	Claves		Claves		Claves		Explosion
      76	Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Dog
      77	Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Horse-Gallop
      78	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Birds
      79	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Rain
      80	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	Thunder
      81	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	Wind
      82	Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Seashore
      83	Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Stream
      84	Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bubble
      85	Castanets		Castanets		Castanets		Cat
      86	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	----
      87	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	----
      88	----		----		----		----
      89	----		----		----		----
      90	----		----		----		----
      91	----		----		----		----
      92	----		----		----		----
      93	----		----		----		----
      94	----		----		----		----
      95	----		----		----		----
      C7	----		----		----		----
      96	----		----		----		----
      97	----		----		----		----
      98	----		----		----		----
      99	----		----		----		----
      100	----		----		----		----
      101	----		----		----		----
      102	----		----		----		----
      103	----		----		----		----

      ---: no sound
      [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number

      Drums/SFX Set List (AT-60SL)

      	POP		ROCK		JAZZ BRUSH		VOX DRUM
      28	707 Claps		707 Claps		707 Claps		707 Claps
      29	Hand Clap 1A	[EXC7]	Hand Clap 1A	[EXC7]	Hand Clap 1A	[EXC7]	Hand Clap 1A	[EXC7]
      30	Hand Clap 2	[EXC7]	Hand Clap 2	[EXC7]	Hand Clap 2	[EXC7]	Hand Clap 2	[EXC7]
      31	Hand Clap 1B	Rk Pedal HH	Hand Clap 1B	Rk Pedal HH	Hand Clap 1B	Pop Pedal HH	Hand Clap 1B	Pop Pedal HH
      32	Pop Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Gospel Clap	[EXC1]	Gospel Clap	[EXC1]	Gospel Clap	[EXC1]
      33	Gospel Clap
      34	SD Roll
      35	Pop BD B
      36	Pop BD A		Rk BD 1A		Pop BD A		Vox Trush
      37	Pop Rim Shot		Rk Rim ShotA		Jz SD Sweep1		Vox Hehho
      38	Pop SD 1		Rk SD 1A		Jz SD A		Vox Dayear
      39	Pop SD Flm B		Rk SD Flm		Jz SD Sweep2		Vox Thu
      40	Pop SD 2		Rk SD 1B		Jz SD B		Vox That
      41	Pop LwTomFIm		Rk LwTom FIm		Jz LwTom Flm		Vox Aahhh
      42	Pop CloseHH1	[EXC1]	Rk CloseHH 1	[EXC1]	Pop CloseHH1	[EXC1]	Vox Tu
      43	Pop Lw Tom		Rk Lw Tom		Jz Lw Tom		Vox Dooh
      44	Pop CloseHH2	[EXC1]	Rk CloseHH 2	[EXC1]	Pop CloseHH2	[EXC1]	Vox Ptu
      45	Pop MdTomFIm		Rk MdTom Flm		Jz MdTom Flm		Vox Down
      46	Pop Open HH	[EXC1]	Rk Open HH	[EXC1]	Pop Open HH	[EXC1]	Vox Pa
      47	Pop Md Tom		Rk Md Tom		Jz Md Tom		Vox Bom
      C3	Pop HiTomFIm		Rk HiTom FIm		Jz HiTom Flm		Vox Toear
      48	PopCrashCym1		PopCrashCym1		Jz CrashCym1		Vox Aahhu
      50	Pop Hi Tom		Rk Hi Tom		Jz Hi Tom		Vox Toya
      51	PopRideCym1A		Rk Ride Cym		Jz RideCym 1		Vox Thuh
      52	Pop ChinaCym		Pop ChinaCym		Jz China Cym		Vox Cheey
      53	Pop RideBell		Pop RideBell		Jz RideCym 2		Vox Cymm
      54	Tambourine 2		Tambourine 2		Tambourine 2		Vox Tub
      55	Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Vox Pruru
      56	ChaChaCowbel		ChaChaCowbel		ChaChaCowbel		Vox Tut
      57	PopCrashCym2		China Cym		Jz CrashCym2		Vox Tyun
      58	Vibra-Slap 2		Vibra-Slap 2		Vibra-Slap 2		Vox Tdum
      59	Pop RideCym2		PopRideCym1B		Pop RideCym2		Vox Afahhh
      60	Hi Bongo 2		Hi Bongo 2		Hi Bongo 2		Hi Bongo 2
      61	LW Bongo 2		LW Bongo 2		LW Bongo 2		LW Bongo 2
      62	Hi CongaSlap		Hi CongaSlap		Hi CongaSlap		Hi CongaSlap
      63	Hi Conga 2		Hi Conga 2		Hi Conga 2		Hi Conga 2
      64	LW Conga 2		LW Conga 2		LW Conga 2		LW Conga 2
      65	Hi Timbale 2		Hi Timbale 2		Hi Timbale 2		Hi Timbale 2
      66	LW Timbale 2		LW Timbale 2		LW Timbale 2		LW Timbale 2
      67	Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo
      68	LW Agogo		LW Agogo		LW Agogo		LW Agogo
      69	Shaker 2		Shaker 2		Shaker 2		Shaker 2
      70	Shaker 3		Shaker 3		Shaker 3		Shaker 3
      71	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]
      72	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]
      73	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]
      74	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]
      75	Claves		Claves		Claves		Claves
      76	Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock
      77	LW WoodBlock		LW WoodBlock		LW WoodBlock		LW WoodBlock
      78	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]
      79	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]
      80	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]
      81	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]
      82	Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1
      83	Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell
      C6	Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree
      84	Castanets		Castanets		Castanets		Castanets
      85	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]
      86	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]
      87	Cana		Cana		Cana		Cana
      88	HiTimbaleFlim		HiTimbaleFlim		HiTimbaleFlim		HiTimbaleFlim
      89	LoTimbaleFlim		LoTimbaleFlim		LoTimbaleFlim		LoTimbaleFlim
      90	HiTimbalePhr		HiTimbalePhr		HiTimbalePhr		HiTimbalePhr
      91	Shekere 1		Shekere 1		Shekere 1		Shekere 1
      92	Shekere 2		Shekere 2		Shekere 2		Shekere 2
      93	LW BongoMute		LW BongoMute		LW BongoMute		LW BongoMute
      94	Hi BongoMute		Hi BongoMute		Hi BongoMute		Hi BongoMute
      95	-----		-----		-----		-----
      96	-----		-----		-----		-----
      97	-----		-----		-----		-----
      98	-----		-----		-----		-----
      99	-----		-----		-----		-----
      100	FlamencClapL		FlamencClapL		FlamencClapL		FlamencClapL
      101	FlamencClapR		FlamencClapR		FlamencClapR		FlamencClapR
      102	BongoCowbelA		BongoCowbelA		BongoCowbelA		BongoCowbelA
      103	-----		-----		-----		-----

      ---: no sound

      [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number

      	JAZZ STANDARD		STANDARD 2		ROOM		ROOM 2
      28	Slap		Slap		Slap		Slap
      29	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]
      30	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]
      31	Sticks		Sticks		Sticks		Sticks
      32	Square Click		Square Click		Square Click		Square Click
      33	Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1
      34	Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1
      35	Std BD 2		Std BD 2		Std BD 2		Std BD 2
      36	Std BD 1		Std BD 1		Std BD 1		Rm BD
      37	Rim Shot		Rim Shot		Rim Shot		Rim Shot
      38	Std SD 1		Std SD 1		Std SD 1		Rm SD 1
      39	Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1
      40	Std SD 2		Std SD 2		Std SD 2		Std SD 2
      41	Lw Tom 2		Lw Tom 2		Rm Lw Tom 2		Rm Lw Tom 2
      42	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	Std Close HH	[EXC1]
      43	Lw Tom 1		Lw Tom 1		Rm Lw Tom 1		Rm Lw Tom 1
      44	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]
      45	Md Tom 2		Md Tom 2		Rm Md Tom 2		Rm Md Tom 2
      46	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	Std Open HH	[EXC1]
      47	Md Tom 1		Md Tom 1		Rm Md Tom 1		Rm Md Tom 1
      C3	Hi Tom 2		Hi Tom 2		Rm Hi Tom 2		Rm2 Hi Tom 2
      48	Crash Cym 1		Crash Cym 1		Crash Cym 1		Crash Cym 1
      50	Hi Tom 1		Hi Tom 1		Rm Hi Tom 1		Rm2 Hi Tom 1
      51	Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1
      52	China Cym		China Cym		China Cym		China Cym
      53	Ride Bell		Ride Bell		Ride Bell		Ride Bell
      54	Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1
      55	Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym
      56	Cowbell		Cowbell		Cowbell		Cowbell
      57	Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2
      58	Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1
      59	Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2
      60	Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1
      61	Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1
      62	Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute
      63	Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1
      64	Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2
      65	Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1
      66	Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1
      67	Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo
      68	Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo
      69	Cabasa		Cabasa		Cabasa		Cabasa
      70	Maracas		Maracas		Maracas		Maracas
      71	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]
      72	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]
      73	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]
      74	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]
      75	Claves		Claves		Claves		Claves
      76	Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock
      77	Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock
      78	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]
      79	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]
      80	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]
      81	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]
      82	Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1
      83	Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell
      C6	Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree
      84	Castanets		Castanets		Castanets		Castanets
      85	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]
      86	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]
      87	-----		-----		-----		-----
      88	-----		-----		-----		-----
      89	-----		-----		-----		-----
      90	-----		-----		-----		-----
      91	-----		-----		-----		-----
      92	-----		-----		-----		-----
      93	-----		-----		-----		-----
      94	-----		-----		-----		-----
      95	-----		-----		-----		-----
      C7	-----		-----		-----		-----
      96	-----		-----		-----		-----
      97	-----		-----		-----		-----
      98	-----		-----		-----		-----
      99	-----		-----		-----		-----
      100	-----		-----		-----		-----
      101	-----		-----		-----		-----
      102	-----		-----		-----		-----
      103	-----		-----		-----		-----

      ---: no sound
      [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number

      	POWER		ELECTRONIC		TR-808		DANCE
      28	Slap		Slap		Slap		SSlap
      29	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]
      30	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]
      31	Sticks		Sticks		Sticks		Dnc SD 1
      32	Square Click		Square Click		Square Click		Square Click
      33	Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1
      34	Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1
      35	Std BD 2		Std BD 2		Std BD 2		Std2 BD 1
      36	Pwr BD		Elec BD		808 BD 1		808 BD 2A
      37	Rim Shot		Rim Shot		808 Rim Shot		808 Rim Shot
      38	Gated SD		Elec SD		808 SD		909 SD
      39	Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1		Hand Clap 1
      40	Std SD 2		Gated SD		Std SD 2		Dnc SD 2B
      41	Rm Lw Tom 2		Elec LwTom 2		808 LwTom 2		808 LwTom 2
      42	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	808CloseHH A	[EXC1]	808CloseHH A	[EXC1]
      43	Rm Lw Tom 1		Elec LwTom 1		808 LwTom 1		808 LwTom 1
      44	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	808CloseHH B	[EXC1]	808CloseHH B	[EXC1]
      45	Rm Md Tom 2		Elec MdTom 2		808 MdTom 2		808 MdTom 2
      46	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	808 Open HH	[EXC1]	808 Open HH	[EXC1]
      47	Rm Md Tom 1		Elec MdTom 1		808 MdTom 1		808 MdTom 1
      48	Rm Hi Tom 2		Elec HiTom 2		808 Hi Tom 2		808 Hi Tom 2
      49	Crash Cym 1		Crash Cym 1		808 Cym		808 Cym
      50	Rm Hi Tom 1		Elec HiTom 1		808 Hi Tom 1		808 Hi Tom 1
      51	Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1
      52	China Cym		Reverse Cym		China Cym		China Cym
      53	Ride Bell		Ride Bell		Ride Bell		Ride Bell
      54	Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1
      55	Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym
      56	Cowbell		Cowbell		Cowbell		Cowbell
      57	Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2
      58	Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1
      59	Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2
      60	Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1
      61	Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1
      62	Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute		808 Hi Conga		808 Hi Conga
      63	Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1		808 McDConga		808 McDConga
      64	Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2		808 LwConga		808 LwConga
      65	Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1
      66	Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1
      67	Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo
      68	Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo
      69	Cabasa		Cabasa		Cabasa		Cabasa
      70	Maracas		Maracas		808 Maracas		808 Maracas
      71	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]
      72	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]
      73	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]
      74	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]
      75	Claves		Claves		808 Claves		808 Claves
      76	Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock
      77	Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock
      78	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]
      79	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]
      80	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]
      81	Open Triangle	[EXC5]	Open Triangle	[EXC5]	Open Triangle	[EXC5]	Open Triangle	[EXC5]
      82	Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1
      83	Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell
      84	Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree
      85	Castanets		Castanets		Castanets		Castanets
      86	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]
      87	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]
      88	-----		-----		-----		-----
      89	-----		-----		-----		-----
      90	-----		-----		-----		-----
      91	-----		-----		-----		-----
      92	-----		-----		-----		-----
      93	-----		-----		-----		-----
      94	-----		-----		-----		-----
      95	-----		-----		-----		-----
      C7	-----		-----		-----		-----
      96	-----		-----		-----		-----
      97	-----		-----		-----		-----
      98	-----		-----		-----		-----
      99	-----		-----		-----		-----
      100	-----		-----		-----		-----
      101	-----		-----		-----		-----
      102	-----		-----		-----		-----
      103	-----		-----		-----		-----

      ---: no sound
      [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number

      	BRUSH		BRUSH 2		ORCHESTRA		SOUND EFFECT
      28	Slap		Slap		Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	----
      29	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Scratch Push	[EXC7]	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	----
      30	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Scratch Pull	[EXC7]	Ride Cym 1		----
      31	Sticks		Sticks		Sticks		----
      32	Square Click		Square Click		Square Click		----
      33	Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1		Metro.Click1		----
      34	Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		Metro.Bell 1		----
      35	Bsh BD 2		Bsh BD 2		Concert BD 2		----
      36	Bsh BD 1		Std2 BD 1		Concert BD 1		----
      37	Rim Shot		Rim Shot		Rim Shot		----
      38	Bsh Tap		Bsh Tap		Concert SD A		----
      39	Bsh Slap		Bsh Slap		Castanets		High Q
      40	Bsh Sweep		Bsh Sweep		Concert SD B		Slap
      41	Lw Tom 2		Bsh Lw Tom 2		Timpani F		Scratch Push [EXC7]
      42	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	Std Close HH	[EXC1]	Timpani F#		Scratch Pull [EXC7]
      43	Lw Tom 1		Bsh Lw Tom 1		Timpani G		Sticks
      44	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Std Pedal HH	[EXC1]	Timpani G#		Square Click
      45	Md Tom 2		Bsh Md Tom 2		Timpani A		Metronome Click
      46	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	Std Open HH	[EXC1]	Timpani A#		Metronome Bell
      47	Md Tom 1		Bsh Md Tom 1		Timpani B		Guitar sliding Finger
      48	Hi Tom 2		Bsh Hi Tom 2		Timpani c		Guitar cutting noise (down)
      49	Crash Cym 1		Crash Cym 1		Timpani c#		Guitar cutting noise (up)
      50	Hi Tom 1		Bsh Hi Tom 1		Timpani d		String slap of double bass
      51	Ride Cym 1		Ride Cym 1		Timpani d#		FI.Key Click
      52	China Cym		China Cym		Timpani e		Laughing
      53	Ride Bell		Ride Bell		Timpani f		Screaming
      54	Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Tambourine 1		Punch
      55	Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Splash Cym		Heart Beat
      56	Cowbell		Cowbell		Cowbell		Footsteps1
      57	Crash Cym 2		Crash Cym 2		ConcertCym 2		Footsteps2
      58	Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Vibra-Slap 1		Applause
      59	Ride Cym 2		Ride Cym 2		ConcertCym 1		Door Creaking
      60	Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Hi Bongo 1		Door
      61	Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Lw Bongo 1		Scratch
      62	Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute		Hi CongaMute		Wind Chimes
      63	Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1		Hi Conga 1		Car-Engine
      64	Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2		Lw Conga 2		Car-Stop
      65	Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Hi Timbale 1		Car-Pass
      66	Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Lw Timbale 1		Car-Crash
      67	Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Hi Agogo		Siren
      68	Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Lw Agogo		Train
      69	Cabasa		Cabasa		Cabasa		Jetplane
      70	Maracas		Maracas		Maracas		Helicopter
      71	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	ShortWhistle	[EXC2]	Starship
      72	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Long Whistle	[EXC2]	Gun Shot
      73	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Short Guiro	[EXC3]	Machine Gun
      74	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Long Guiro	[EXC3]	Lasergun
      75	Claves		Claves		Claves		Explosion
      76	Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Hi WoodBlock		Dog
      77	Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Lw WoodBlock		Horse-Gallop
      78	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Mute Cuica	[EXC4]	Birds
      79	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Open Cuica	[EXC4]	Rain
      80	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	MuteTriangle	[EXC5]	Thunder
      81	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	OpenTriangle	[EXC5]	Wind
      82	Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Shaker 1		Seashore
      83	Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Jingle Bell		Stream
      84	Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bell Tree		Bubble
      85	Castanets		Castanets		Castanets		Cat
      86	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	Mute Surdo	[EXC6]	----
      87	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	Open Surdo	[EXC6]	----
      88	----		----		----		----
      89	----		----		----		----
      90	----		----		----		----
      91	----		----		----		----
      92	----		----		----		----
      93	----		----		----		----
      94	----		----		----		----
      95	----		----		----		----
      C7	----		----		----		----
      96	----		----		----		----
      97	----		----		----		----
      98	----		----		----		----
      99	----		----		----		----
      100	----		----		----		----
      101	----		----		----		----
      102	----		----		----		----
      103	----		----		----		----

      ---: no sound
      [EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number

      Manual Percussion List (AT-80SL)

      PERC. SET 1
      PERC. SET 2
      PERC. SET 3
      ORCHESTRA SET

      28	Crash Cymbal	Mallet Cymbal	Triangle Open	Mallet Cymbal
      29	Snare Roll	Slap Stick	Triangle Mute	Snare Roll
      30	Concert Snare Drum	Ratchet	Triangle Roll	Concert Snare Drum
      31	Concert Cymbal	Concert Cymbal	Wind Chime Up	Crash Cymbal
      32	Concert BD 1	Concert BD 2	Wind Chime Down	Concert BD 2
      33	Jingle Bell	Bar Chime	Vibra Slap	MalletCymbal Roll
      34	Metronome Bell	Finger Snap	Finger Cymbal	Timpani Roll
      35	Timpani Roll	Timpani 2 (Low)	Gong Roll	Timpani 2 (Low)
      36	Timpani	Timpani 2 (Hi)	Mallet Cymbal Roll	Timpani 2 (Hi)
      37	Church Bell	Church Bell 2	Cowbell	Triangle Open
      38	Big Gong	Church Bell 2 Loop	Claves	Big Gong
      39	Hand Clap	Castanet (One Shot)	Clavs Loop	Triangle Roll
      40	High Wood Block	Castanet	Tambourine	Tambourine 2
      41	Low Wood Block	Castanet (Loop)	Tambourine 2	Tambourine Roll
      42	Tambourine	Tambourine 2	Tambourine Roll	WindChime Up

      ORCHESTRA SET 2
      LATIN SET
      ASIAN
      VOICE PHRASE

      28	Cymbal Roll > Crescendo	Bongo Open (Low) [mf/f]		Gong	Amen 1(Mid)
      29	Snare Roll	Bongo Open (Hi) [mf/f]		Hu Yin Lou (Low) [Open/Mute]	Amen 1(Hi1)
      30	Dynamic Snare	Conga (Low) [Mute/Open]		Shu Gu	Amen 1(Hi2)
      31	Concert Cymbal 2	Conga (Hi) [Mute/Open]		Hu Yin Lou (Hi) [Oenp/Mute]	Amen 2(Mid)
      32	Dynamic Bass Drum	Conga [Roll/Thumb]		Shu Gu Rim	Amen 2(Hi)
      33	Short Cymbal	Timbales Open (Low)		Shou Luo (Low)	Amen 3(Mid)
      34	Timpani Roll 2	Timbales (Hi) [Open/Rim]		Tang Gu [Open/Mute]	Amen 3(Hi)
      35	Dynamic Timpani (Low)	Timbales Fill [Low/Hi]		Shou Luo (Hi)	Alleluia 1(Mid)
      36	Dynamic Timpani (Hi)	Claves		Nao Bo	Alleluia 1(Hi)
      37	Cowbell	Cuica [Low/Hi]		Gu (Roll)	Alleluia 2(Hi)
      38	Claves	Guiro [Long/Short]		Xiao Bo	Alleluia 2(Mid)
      39	Wind Whistle	Maracas		Gu (Hi)	Hey (Hi)
      40	High Wood Block	Shaker [Long/Short]		Banb Gu (Low) [Mid/Flam]	Hey (Mid)
      41	Low Wood Block	Apito [Low/Hi]		Banb Gu (Hi)	Woo (Mid)
      42	Bell Tree	Quijada		Chen Chen [Open/Close]	Woo (Hi)

      VOICE PHRASE 2
      VOICE PHRASE 3
      SFX SET
      SFX SET 2

      28	Alolalo solo		Sabor!	Car Engine 2	London Station
      29	Alleluia solo		Sabor Sabor!	Car Horn	Train Pass
      30	Freedom	[Long/Short]	Grito-Bah	Compressor	Firework
      31	Glory		Grito-Chiquittita	Big Shot	Thunder
      32	Alleluia		Baila Baila!	Cricket	Jungle
      33	Soul		Arriba Arriba!	Horse-Gallop	Bird
      34	Victory		Sacala Sacala!	SL 1	Elephant
      35	Hey		Azucal Azucal!	SL 2	Dozilla
      36	Woo	[Long/Short]	Grito-Hahahahaha!	Crack Bottle	Clock
      37	Yeah	[Long/Short]	A si A si!	Ice Ring	Hibashi Furin [Short/Long]
      38	Yes	[Long/Short]	Grito-Hoi Hoi Hoi!	Glass & Glam	Smash Glass
      39	One		Uno!	Pour Bottle	Bubble
      40	Two		Dos!	Soda	Rain
      41	Three		Tres!	Small Club	Wave
      42	Aou		Quatro!	Baby Laughing	Drops

      JAPANESE SET
      JAPANESE SET 2

      C2	28	Wadaiko	Hah Doshita (Solo)
      	29	Wadaiko Rim	Hah Doshita
      	30	Shimedaiko	Hah Sorekara Doshita
      	31	Atarigane	Yaretto
      	32	Atarigane Side	Enya koraya
      	33	Furin	Hah Dokkoi
      	34	Hyoshigi	Hai Hai
      	35	Ohkawa	Dokkoi-syo Dokkoi-syo
      	36	Tsuchumi (Low)	Hai Hai (Solo)
      	37	Tsuchumi (Hi)	Dokkoi-syo Dokkoi-syo (Solo)
      	38	Mokugyo (Low)	Dokkoisa
      	39	Mokugyo (Hi)	Korasyo
      	40	Ho	Haiyasaka
      	41	Iyooh	Sora Enyakora
      	42	Yoh	Hoisa Hoisa

      Manual Percussion List (AT-60SL)

      PERC. SET 1		PERC. SET 2		LATIN SET		VOICE PHRASE
      28	Crash Cymbal	Mallet Cymbal	Bongo Open (Low) [mf/f]			Amen 1(Mid)
      29	Snare Roll	Slap Stick	Bongo Open (Hi) [mf/f]			Amen 1(Hi1)
      30	Concert Snare Drum	Ratchet	Conga (Low) [Mute/Open]			Amen 1(Hi2)
      31	Concert Cymbal	Concert Cymbal	Conga (Hi) [Mute/Open]			Amen 2(Mid)
      32	Concert BD 1	Concert BD 2	Conga [Roll/Thumb]			Amen 2(Hi)
      33	Jingle Bell	Bar Chime	Timbales Open (Low)			Amen 3(Mid)
      34	Metronome Bell	Finger Snap	Timbales (Hi) [Open/Rim]			Amen 3(Hi)
      35	Timpani Roll	Timpani 2 (Low)	Timbales Fill [Low/Hi]			Alleluia 1(Mid)
      36	Timpani	Timpani 2 (Hi)	Claves			Alleluia 1(Hi)
      37	Church Bell	Church Bell 2	Cuica [Low/Hi]			Alleluia 2(Hi)
      38	Big Gong	Church Bell 2 Loop	Guiro [Long/Short]			Alleluia 2(Mid)
      39	Hand Clap	Castanet (One Shot)	Maracas			Hey (Hi)
      40	High Wood Block	Castanet	Shaker [Long/Short]			Hey (Mid)
      41	Low Wood Block	Castanet (Loop)	Apito [Low/Hi]			Woo (Mid)
      42	Tambourine	Tambourine 2	Quijada			Woo (Hi)

      	VOICE PHRASE 2		SFX SET	JAPANESE SET
      28	Alolalo solo		Car Engine 2	Wadaiko
      29	Alleluia solo		Car Horn	Wadaiko Rim
      30	Freedom	[Long/Short]	Compressor	Shimedaiko
      31	Glory		Big Shot	Atarigane
      32	Alleluia		Cricket	Atarigane Side
      33	Soul		Horse-Gallop	Furin
      34	Victory		SL 1	Hyoshigi
      35	Hey		SL 2	Ohkawa
      C2	Woo	[Long/Short]	Crack Bottle	Tsuzumi (Low)
      36	Yeah	[Long/Short]	Ice Ring	Tsuzumi (Hi)
      37	Yes	[Long/Short]	Glass & Glam	Mokugyo (Low)
      38	One		Pour Bottle	Mokugyo (Hi)
      39	Two		Soda	Ho
      40	Three		Small Club	Iyooh
      41	Aou		Baby Laughing	Yoh

      Instruments List (Rhythm Customize Function)

      POP

      PopCrashCym1

      PopCrashCym2

      Splash Cym

      Pop ChinaCym

      PopRideCym1A

      Pop RideCym2

      Pop RideBell

      Cymbal Roll

      Pop CloseHH1

      Pop CloseHH2

      Pop Pedal HH

      Pop Open HH

      Pop SD 1

      Pop SD 2

      Pop SD Flm B

      Pop SD 3C

      Pop SD 3D

      Pop SD Flm A

      R&B SD B

      Rk SD 2A

      Rk SD 2B

      Jz SD C

      Jz SDD

      Rm SD 1

      Rm SD 2

      8850 SD 1

      8850 SD 2

      SD Roll

      Pop Rim Shot

      Rk Rim ShotB

      Pop Hi Tom

      Pop HiTomFlm

      Pop Md Tom

      Pop MdTomFlm

      Pop Lw Tom

      Pop LwTomFlm

      Pop BD A

      Pop BD B

      Pop BD C

      Rk BD 2

      Jz BD 1

      Hip BD 1

      Std2 BD 2A

      Std2 BD 2B

      8850 BD 1

      8850 BD 2

      909 BD 1A

      909 BD 1B

      909 BD 2

      Jungle BD 1A

      Jungle BD 1B

      Tambourine 2

      BongoCowbelA

      BongoCowbelB

      ChaChaCowbel

      Vibra-Slap 2

      707 Claps

      Hand Clap 1A

      Hand Clap 1B

      Hand Clap 2

      Gospel Clap

      FlamencClapL

      FlamencClapR

      Finger Snap

      Hi Bongo 2

      Hi BongoMute

      Lw Bongo 2

      Lw BongoMute

      Hi CongaSlap

      Hi Conga 2

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 2

      HiTimbaleFlm

      Lw Timbale 2

      LoTimbaleFlm

      HiTimbalePhr

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Shaker 2

      Shaker 3

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      Cana

      Shekere 1

      Shekere 2

      Vox Afahhh B

      Vox That B

      Vox Aahhh B

      R&B

      PopCrashCym1

      PopCrashCym2

      Splash Cym

      Pop ChinaCym

      PopRideCym1A

      PopRideCym1B

      Pop RideBell

      Cymbal Roll

      Pop CloseHH1

      Pop CloseHH2

      Pop Pedal HH

      Pop Open HH

      R&B SD A

      R&B SD B

      Pop SD 3C

      Pop SD 3D

      Pop SD 3E

      Pop SD Flm A

      Rk SD 2A

      Rk SD 2B

      Rk SD Flm

      Jz SD C

      Jz SDD

      Rm SD 1

      Rm SD 2

      8850 SD 1

      8850 SD 2

      SD Roll

      Pop Rim Shot

      Rk Rim ShotB

      Pop Hi Tom

      Pop HiTomFlm

      Pop Md Tom

      Pop MdTomFlm

      Pop Lw Tom

      Pop LwTomFlm

      Pop BD A

      Pop BD B

      Pop BD C

      Rk BD 2

      Jz BD 1

      Hip BD 1

      Std2 BD 2A

      Std2 BD 2B

      8850 BD 1

      8850 BD 2

      909 BD 1A

      909 BD 1B

      909 BD 2

      Jungle BD 1A

      Jungle BD 1B

      Tambourine 2

      BongoCowbelA

      BongoCowbelB

      ChaChaCowbel

      Vibra-Slap 2

      707 Claps

      Hand Clap 1A

      Hand Clap 1B

      Hand Clap 2

      Gospel Clap

      FlamencClapL

      FlamencClapR

      Finger Snap

      Hi Bongo 2

      Hi BongoMute

      Lw Bongo 2

      Lw BongoMute

      Hi CongaSlap

      Hi Conga 2

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 2

      HiTimbaleFlm

      Lw Timbale 2

      LoTimbaleFlm

      HiTimbalePhr

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Shaker 2

      Shaker 3

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      Cana

      Shekere 1

      Shekere 2

      Vox Afahhh B

      Vox That B

      Vox Aahhh B

      ROCK

      PopCrashCym1

      Splash Cym

      Pop ChinaCym

      China Cym

      Rk Ride Cym

      PopRideCym1B

      Pop RideBell

      Cymbal Roll

      Rk CloseHH 1

      Rk CloseHH 2

      Rk Pedal HH

      Rk Open HH

      Rk SD 1A

      Rk SD 1B

      Rk SD Flm

      Pop SD 3A

      Pop SD 3B

      Pop SD 3C

      Pop SD 3D

      Pop SD Flm A

      R&B SD B

      Jz SD C

      Jz SDD

      Rm SD 1

      Rm SD 2

      8850 SD 1

      8850 SD 2

      SD Roll

      Rk Rim ShotA

      Rk Rim ShotB

      Rk Hi Tom

      Rk HiTom Flm

      Rk Md Tom

      Rk MdTom Flm

      Rk Lw Tom

      Rk LwTom Flm

      Rk BD 1A

      Rk BD 1B

      Rk BD 2

      Pop BD C

      Jz BD 1

      Hip BD 1

      Std2 BD 2A

      Std2 BD 2B

      8850 BD 1

      8850 BD 2

      909 BD 1A

      909 BD 1B

      909 BD 2

      Jungle BD 1A

      Jungle BD 1B

      Tambourine 2

      BongoCowbelA

      BongoCowbelB

      ChaChaCowbel

      Vibra-Slap 2

      707 Claps

      Hand Clap 1A

      Hand Clap 1B

      Hand Clap 2

      Gospel Clap

      FlamencClapL

      FlamencClapR

      Finger Snap

      Hi Bongo 2

      Hi BongoMute

      Lw Bongo 2

      Lw BongoMute

      Hi CongaSlap

      Hi Conga 2

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 2

      HiTimbaleFlm

      Lw Timbale 2

      LoTimbaleFlm

      HiTimbalePhr

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Shaker 2

      Shaker 3

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      Cana

      Shekere 1

      Shekere 2

      Vox Afahhh B

      Vox That B

      Vox Aahhh B

      JAZZ BRUSH

      Jz CrashCym1

      Jz CrashCym2

      Splash Cym

      Jz China Cym

      Jz RideCym 1

      Jz RideCym 2

      Pop RideCym2

      Cymbal Roll

      Pop CloseHH1

      Pop CloseHH2

      Pop Pedal HH

      Pop Open HH

      Jz SD A

      Jz SD B

      Jz SD C

      Jz SD D

      Jz SD Sweep1

      Jz SD Sweep2

      Pop SD 3A

      Pop SD 3B

      Pop SD 3C

      Pop SD 3D

      Pop SD Flm A

      R&BSDB

      Rm SD 1

      Rm SD 2

      8850 SD 1

      8850 SD 2

      SD Roll

      Rk Rim ShotB

      Jz Hi Tom

      Jz HiTom Flm

      Jz Md Tom

      Jz MdTom Flm

      Jz Lw Tom

      Jz LwTom Flm

      Pop BD A

      Pop BD B

      Pop BD C

      Rk BD 2

      Jz BD 1

      Hip BD 1

      Std2 BD 2A

      Std2 BD 2B

      8850 BD 1

      8850 BD 2

      909 BD 1A

      909 BD 1B

      909 BD 2

      Jungle BD 1A

      Jungle BD 1B

      Tambourine 2

      BongoCowbelA

      BongoCowbelB

      ChaChaCowbel

      Vibra-Slap 2

      707 Claps

      Hand Clap 1A

      Hand Clap 1B

      Hand Clap 2

      Gospel Clap

      FlamencClapL

      FlamencClapR

      Finger Snap

      Hi Bongo 2

      Hi BongoMute

      Lw Bongo 2

      Lw BongoMute

      Hi CongaSlap

      Hi Conga 2

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 2

      HiTimbaleFlm

      Lw Timbale 2

      LoTimbaleFlm

      HiTimbalePhr

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Shaker 2

      Shaker 3

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      Cana

      Shekere 1

      Shekere 2

      Vox Afahhh B

      Vox That B

      Vox Aahhh B

      - HIP HOP

      Crash Cym 1

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      Reverse Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      Std2 CloseHH

      Std2 PedalHH

      Hip Open HH

      Hip SD

      Dnc SD 2B

      Dnc SD 2D

      Dnc SD 2E

      Dnc SD 2H

      Dnc SD 1B

      Dnc SD 1C

      Dnc SD 1D

      Dnc SD 3

      Rap SD A

      Rap SD B

      Rap SD C

      Jungle SD

      Std SD 1A

      Std SD 1B

      Std SD 1C

      Std2 SD 1

      Rm SD 1A

      Rm SD 1B

      Rm SD 1C

      Elec SD

      808SDA

      808 SD B

      808 SD C

      909 SD A

      909 SD B

      909 SD C

      909 SD D

      909 SDE

      909 SD F

      Concert SD

      SD Roll

      808 Rim Shot

      Sticks 2

      Lw Tom 1

      Lw Tom 2

      Md Tom 1

      Md Tom 2

      Hi Tom 1

      Hi Tom 2

      909Comp BD A

      909Comp BDB

      909 BD 3 A

      909 BD 3 B

      Hip BD 2B

      Hip BD 1

      Jungle BD 2

      Jungle BD 3A

      Jungle BD 3B

      808BD2C

      808BD2D

      808BD2E

      808BD2F

      808BD2G

      808BD3

      808BD1

      Hip BD 2A

      Std BD 1

      Rm BD

      Elec BD

      TambourinShk

      808 Cowbell

      HipVibraslap

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Hip HandClap

      Hand Clap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      Hi CongaMute

      Hi Conga 1

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Cabasa

      Hip Maracas

      Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      808 Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      Small Club

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Slap B

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Click2

      Metro.Click3

      Metro.Bell 1

      Voice One

      Voice Two

      Voice Three

      Bounce

      Techno Hit A

      Philly Hit

      Shock Wave

      Techno Hit B

      Bam Hit

      Bim Hit

      Tape Rewind

      Phono Noise

      - VOX DRUM

      Vox Dut

      Vox Dom

      Vox Trush

      Vox Hehho

      Vox Doyear

      Vox Thu

      Vox That A

      Vox That B

      Vox Aahhh A

      Vox Aahhh B

      Vox Tu

      Vox Dooh

      Vox Ptu

      Vox Down

      Vox Pa

      Vox Bom

      Vox Toear

      Vox Aahhu

      Vox Toya

      Vox Thuh

      Vox Cheey

      Vox Cymm

      Vox Tub

      Vox Pruru

      Vox Tut

      Vox Tyun

      Vox Tdum

      Vox Afahhh A

      Vox Afahhh B

      Cymbal Roll

      Pop Pedal HH

      Pop SD 3C

      Pop SD 3D

      Pop SD Flm A

      R&B SD B

      Rk SD 2A

      Rk SD 2B

      Jz SD C

      Jz SD D

      Rm SD 1

      Rm SD 2

      8850 SD 1

      8850 SD 2

      Rk Rim ShotB

      Pop BD C

      Rk BD 2

      Jz BD 1

      Hip BD 1

      Vox Bum

      Std2 BD 2

      8850 BD1

      8850 BD 2

      909BD1A

      909 BD 1B

      909 BD 2

      Jungle BD 1A

      Jungle BD 1B

      BongoCowbelA

      BongoCowbelB

      707 Claps

      Hand Clap 1A

      Hand Clap 1B

      Hand Clap 2

      Gospel Clap

      FlamencClapL

      FlamencClapR

      Finger Snap

      Hi Bongo 2

      Hi BongoMute

      Lw Bongo 2

      Lw BongoMute

      Hi CongaSlap

      Hi Conga 2

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 2

      HiTimbaleFlm

      Lw Timbale 2

      LoTimbaleFlm

      HiTimbalePhr

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Shaker 2

      Shaker 3

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      Cana

      Shekere 1

      Shekere 2

      STANDARD

      Crash Cym 1

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      China Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      Std Close HH

      Std Pedal HH

      Std Open HH

      Std SD 1

      Std SD 2

      SD Roll

      Rim Shot

      Sticks 1

      Hi Tom 1

      Hi Tom 2

      Md Tom 1

      Md Tom 2

      Lw Tom 1

      Lw Tom 2

      Std BD 1

      Std BD 2

      Tambourine 1

      Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Hand Clap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      Hi CongaMute

      Hi Conga 1

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      STANDARD 2

      Crash Cym 1

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      China Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      Std2 CloseHH

      Std2 PedalHH

      Std2 Open HH

      Std2 SD 1

      Std2 SD 2

      SD Roll

      Rim Shot

      Sticks 1

      Hi Tom 1

      Hi Tom 2

      Md Tom 1

      Md Tom 2

      Lw Tom 1

      Lw Tom 2

      Std2 BD 1

      Std2 BD 2

      Tambourine 1

      Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Hand Clap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Finger SnapB

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      Hi CongaMute

      Hi Conga 1

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Bar Chimes B

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      ROOM

      Crash Cym 1

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      China Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      Std Close HH

      Std Pedal HH

      Std Open HH

      Std SD 1

      Std SD 2

      SD Roll

      Rim Shot

      Sticks 1

      Rm Hi Tom 1

      Rm Hi Tom 2

      Rm Md Tom 1

      Rm Md Tom 2

      Rm Lw Tom 1

      Rm Lw Tom 2

      Std BD 1

      Std BD 2

      Tambourine 1

      Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Hand Clap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      Hi CongaMute

      Hi Conga 1

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      ROOM2

      Crash Cym 1

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      China Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      Std2 CloseHH

      Std2 PedalHH

      Std2 Open HH

      Rm SD 1

      Std2 SD 1

      SD Roll

      Rim Shot

      Sticks 1

      Rm2 Hi Tom 1

      Rm2 Hi Tom 2

      Rm2 Md Tom 1

      Rm2 Md Tom 2

      Rm2 Lw Tom 1

      Rm2 Lw Tom 2

      Rm BD

      Std2 BD 1

      Tambourine 1

      Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Hand Clap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      Hi CongaMute

      Hi Conga 1

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      POWER

      Crash Cym 1

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      China Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      Std Close HH

      Std Pedal HH

      Std Open HH

      Gated SD

      Std SD 2

      SD Roll

      Rim Shot

      Sticks 1

      Rm Hi Tom 1

      Rm Hi Tom 2

      Rm Md Tom 1

      Rm Md Tom 2

      Rm Lw Tom 1

      Rm Lw Tom 2

      Pwr BD

      Std BD 2

      Tambourine 1

      Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Hand Clap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      Hi CongaMute

      Hi Conga 1

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      ELECTRONIC

      Crash Cym 1

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      Reverse Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      Std Close HH

      Std Pedal HH

      Std Open HH

      Elec SD

      Gated SD

      SD Roll

      Rim Shot

      Sticks 1

      Elec HiTom 1

      Elec HiTom 2

      Elec MdTom 1

      Elec MdTom 2

      Elec LwTom 1

      Elec LwTom 2

      Elec BD

      Std BD 2

      Tambourine 1

      Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Hand Clap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      Hi CongaMute

      Hi Conga 1

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      TR-808

      808 Cym

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      China Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      808CloseHH A

      808CloseHH B

      808 Open HH

      808 SD

      Std SD 2

      SD Roll

      808 Rim Shot

      Sticks 1

      808 Hi Tom 1

      808 Hi Tom 2

      808 Md Tom 1

      808 Md Tom 2

      808 Lw Tom 1

      808 Lw Tom 2

      808BD1

      Std BD 2

      Tambourine 1

      808 Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Hand Clap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      808 Hi Conga

      808 Md Conga

      808 Lw Conga

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      808 Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      808 Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      DANCE

      808 Cym

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      China Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      808CloseHHA

      808CloseHH B

      808 Open HH

      909 SD

      Dnc SD 2B

      SD Roll

      808 Rim Shot

      Dnc SD 1

      808 Hi Tom 1

      808 Hi Tom 2

      808 Md Tom 1

      808 Md Tom 2

      808 Lw Tom 1

      808 Lw Tom 2

      808BD2A

      Std2 BD 1

      Tambourine 1

      808 Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Hand Clap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      808 Hi Conga

      808 Md Conga

      808 Lw Conga

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      808 Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      808 Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      JAZZ

      Crash Cym 1

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      China Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      Std Close HH

      Std Pedal HH

      Std Open HH

      Std SD 1

      Std SD 2

      SD Roll

      Rim Shot

      Sticks 1

      Hi Tom 1

      Hi Tom 2

      Md Tom 1

      Md Tom 2

      Lw Tom 1

      Lw Tom 2

      Bsh BD 1

      Bsh BD 2

      Tambourine 1

      Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Hand Clap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      Hi CongaMute

      Hi Conga 1

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      BRUSH

      Crash Cym 1

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      China Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      Std Close HH

      Std Pedal HH

      Std Open HH

      Bsh Tap

      Bsh Slap

      Bsh Sweep

      SD Roll

      Rim Shot

      Sticks 1

      Hi Tom 1

      Hi Tom 2

      Md Tom 1

      Md Tom 2

      Lw Tom 1

      Lw Tom 2

      Bsh BD 1

      Bsh BD 2

      Tambourine 1

      Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      Hi CongaMute

      Hi Conga 1

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      BRUSH 2

      Crash Cym 1

      Crash Cym 2

      Splash Cym

      China Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Ride Cym 2

      Ride Bell

      Std Close HH

      Std Pedal HH

      Std Open HH

      Bsh Tap

      Bsh Slap

      Bsh Sweep

      SD Roll

      Rim Shot

      Sticks 1

      Bsh Hi Tom 1

      Bsh Hi Tom 2

      Bsh Md Tom 1

      Bsh Md Tom 2

      Bsh Lw Tom 1

      Bsh Lw Tom 2

      Std2 BD 1

      Bsh BD 2

      Tambourine 1

      Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      Hi CongaMute

      Hi Conga 1

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Castanets A

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      High-Q

      Slap A

      Scratch Push

      Scratch Pull

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      ORCHESTRA

      ConcertCym 1

      ConcertCym 2

      Splash Cym

      Ride Cym 1

      Std Close HH

      Std Pedal HH

      Std Open HH

      Concert SD A

      Concert SDB

      SD Roll

      Rim Shot

      Sticks 1

      Timpani f

      Timpani e

      Timpani d#

      Timpani d

      Timpani c#

      Timpanic

      Timpani B

      Timpani A#

      Timpani A

      Timpani G#

      Timpani G

      Timpani F#

      Timpani F

      Concert BD 1

      Concert BD 2

      Tambourine 1

      Cowbell

      Vibra-Slap 1

      Finger SnapA

      Hi Bongo 1

      Lw Bongo 1

      Hi CongaMute

      Hi Conga 1

      Lw Conga 2

      Hi Timbale 1

      Lw Timbale 1

      Hi Agogo

      Lw Agogo

      Shaker 1

      Cabasa

      Maracas

      ShortWhistle

      Long Whistle

      Short Guiro

      Long Guiro

      Claves

      Hi WoodBlock

      Lw WoodBlock

      Mute Cuica

      Open Cuica

      MuteTriangle

      OpenTriangle

      Jingle Bell

      Bell Tree

      Bar Chimes A

      Castanets A

      Castanets B

      Mute Surdo

      Open Surdo

      Applause

      Square Click

      Metro.Click1

      Metro.Bell 1

      Key to Abbreviations

      Rk Rock

      Jz JazzBrush

      Hip HipHop

      Std Standard

      Rm Room

      Std2 Standard2

      Rm2 Room2

      Pwr Power

      Elec Electric

      Bsh Brush

      Hi High

      Md Mid

      LW Low

      Cym Cymbal

      HH High

      SD SnareDrum

      BD BassDrum

      FIm Flam

      Phr Phrase

      Metro. Metronome

      Rhythm List (AT-80SL)

      Big Band/Swing

      LooseBigBand

      Big Serenade

      Big Band Pop

      Fast BigBand

      Cool Swing

      Jazzy Choi

      Organ Swing

      Scat Swing

      New Big Band

      BigBandSwing

      BigBndBallad

      Big Band

      Club Swing

      Vocal Swing

      Medium Swing

      A Cappella

      Big Band 2

      Jazz Band

      ChooChooSwng

      Boogie

      Combo

      Slow Swing

      Swing

      Blues

      Shuffle

      Country/Gospel

      Cntry Dreams

      D Country 1

      D Country 2

      OldtimeCntry

      GospelShuffl

      Soft Gospel

      Gospel Piano

      Gospel Pop

      HonkyTonkin'

      Hoedown

      Twostep

      Country Piano

      Revival

      Gospel Shout

      GospelBallad

      Gospel 1

      CountrySwing

      Easy Country

      CountryWaltz

      Cajun

      Gospel 2

      Anthem

      R&B

      Chapel

      CtrySerenade

      CountryRoads

      Oldies/Contempo

      Pop Fox

      Easy 8-Beat

      Rock'n'Fever

      JB Soul

      Groovin'

      Michael'sPop

      8-Beat Pop

      '70s 1

      Let's Twist

      Surf fun

      Swing Pop

      Mersey Beat

      Let's Dance

      Popular Piano

      Easy Listen1

      Easy Listen2

      Early Rock

      '50s Ballad

      Slow Dance

      Acoustic Pop

      Euro Dance

      Rollin'

      16BeatShuffling

      Easy Listen3

      Beach Sound

      Twist

      '50s Pop 1

      '50s Pop 2

      Easy Listen4

      Light Fusion

      '70s disco

      16-BeatPop 1

      Dreamin'

      Da Blues

      Motown

      Pop'n'Roll

      16-BeatPop 2

      Light HipHop

      Sunny Pop

      Hip Hop

      Rock'n'Roll

      ShufflePop 1

      ShufflePop 2

      Rock'n'Shfll

      House Pop

      Rock'n'Pop

      Cute Pop

      Rock'n'Roll2

      AcousticRock

      Ballad

      ContmpBallad

      6/8 Ballad

      Scat Ballad

      8BeatBallad1

      8BeatBallad2

      Sunny Feelin'

      Soft Ballad

      Ballad

      Love Romance

      Love Songs

      Torch Song

      Torch Song 2

      MediumBallad

      Pop Ballad

      '60s Ballad

      Crystal

      Classic

      World

      Paris

      French Waltz

      Irish

      Ireland

      Scotland

      Hula

      Hawaiian

      D Marsch 6/8

      Sevilla

      Habanera

      Reggae

      Latin

      Slow Rhumba

      BigBandSamba

      New ChaCha

      Trad Tango

      Mambo 3

      Plena

      Bossa Nova 1

      Piano Latin

      Slow Bossa

      Slow Beguine

      Latin

      Rhumba

      Bossa Nova

      Bossa Nova 2

      Bossa Nova 3

      Bossa Nova 4

      FastBosaNova

      NewBossaNova

      ChaCha

      ChaCha 2

      Salsa

      Samba

      Rhumba 2

      Beguine

      Mambo

      Tango 1

      Tango 2

      Latin Fusion

      Samba Rio

      Waltz/March

      Quiet Waltz

      Slow Waltz

      Jazz Waltz

      Summer Days

      MarchingBand

      Parade

      March

      March 4/4

      Last Dance

      StringsWaltz

      Waltz

      Musette

      March 6/8

      March 2/4

      Simple March

      Vienna Waltz

      Trad/Showtime

      Quick Step

      Lager Polka

      Paso Doble

      Foxtrot 2

      Stage Waltz

      Raindrops

      Screen 1

      Screen 2

      Polka

      Charleston

      Foxtrot

      Ragtime

      Music Hall

      Broadway

      Bubbles

      Balloon Trip

      Dixieland

      PianoBoogie1

      Festival

      Little Steps

      Cinema

      Entertaining

      ■ Acoustic

      Guitar Trio

      Fireside

      G.Pop

      G.Fast Pop

      G.Slow

      G.Shuffle

      PianoRagtime

      P.Swing

      P.Slow

      P.Jazz

      P.Night

      P.Pop

      P.Concerto

      R.8-Beat 1

      R.8-Beat 2

      R.16-Beat 1

      R.16-Beat 2

      R.16-Beat 3

      R.16-Beat 4

      R.Swing 1

      R.Afro&Swing

      R.5BeatSwing

      R.Shuffle 1

      R.Waltz 1

      R.March 1

      R.5-Beat

      R.7-Beat

      Disk/User

      6/8 Ballad

      Trad Tango

      MarchingBand

      Guitar Trio

      Rhythm List (AT-60SL)

      Big Band/Swing

      LooseBigBand

      Big Serenade

      Fast BigBand

      New Big Band

      Organ Swing

      Scat Swing

      Club Swing

      Vocal Swing

      BigBandSwing

      BigBndBallad

      Big Band

      Big Band 2

      Medium Swing

      A Cappella

      Combo

      Slow Swing

      Jazz Band

      ChooChooSwng

      Boogie

      Blues

      Swing

      Shuffle

      Country/Gospel

      Cntry Dreams

      D Country 1

      D Country 2

      OldtimeCntry

      Soft Gospel

      Gospel Pop

      Revival

      GospelBallad

      Hoedown

      Twostep

      Country Piano

      CountrySwing

      Gospel 1

      Gospel 2

      Anthem

      R&B

      Easy Country

      CountryWaltz

      Cajun

      CountryRoads

      Oldies/Contempo

      JB Soul

      Let's Twist

      Surf fun

      Swing Pop

      Groovin'

      Michael's Pop

      8-Beat Pop

      '70s 1

      Mersey Beat

      '50s Ballad

      Slow Dance

      Acoustic Pop

      Let's Dance

      Popular Piano

      Easy Listen1

      Easy Listen2

      Beach Sound

      Twist

      '50s Pop 1

      '50s Pop 2

      Euro Dance

      Rollin'

      Easy Listen3

      16-BeatPop 1

      Dreamin'

      Motown

      Pop'n'Roll

      Rock'n'Roll

      16-BeatPop 2

      Light HipHop

      Hip Hop

      House Pop

      ShufflePop 1

      ShufflePop 2

      Rock'n'Pop

      Cute Pop

      Ballad

      6/8 Ballad

      Scat Ballad

      8BeatBallad1

      8BeatBallad2

      Sunny Feelin'

      Soft Ballad

      Ballad

      Love Romance

      Love Songs

      Torch Song

      MediumBallad

      Pop Ballad

      '60s Ballad

      Crystal

      Classic

      World

      Paris

      French Waltz

      Irish

      Ireland

      Scotland

      Hula

      Hawaiian

      D Marsch 6/8

      Reggae

      Latin

      Slow Rhumba

      Trad Tango

      Mambo 3

      Plena

      Bossa Nova 1

      Slow Bossa

      Slow Beguine

      Latin

      Rhumba

      Bossa Nova

      Bossa Nova 2

      Bossa Nova 3

      Bossa Nova 4

      FastBosaNova

      NewBossaNova

      ChaCha

      ChaCha 2

      Salsa

      Samba

      Beguine

      Mambo

      Tango 1

      Tango 2

      Latin Fusion

      Samba Rio

      Waltz/March

      Quiet Waltz

      Slow Waltz

      Jazz Waltz

      Summer Days

      MarchingBand

      March

      March 4/4

      March 6/8

      Last Dance

      StringsWaltz

      Waltz

      Musette

      March 2/4

      Simple March

      Trad/Showtime

      Quick Step

      Lager Polka

      Foxtrot 2

      Polka

      Stage Waltz

      Raindrops

      Screen 1

      Screen 2

      Charleston

      Foxtrot

      Ragtime

      Dixieland

      Music Hall

      Broadway

      Festival

      Little Steps

      PianoBoogie1

      Acoustic

      Guitar Trio

      Fireside

      G.Pop

      G.Fast Pop

      G.Slow

      G.Shuffle

      PianoRagtime

      P.Swing

      P.Slow

      P.Jazz

      P.Night

      P.Pop

      R.8-Beat 1

      R.8-Beat 2

      R.16-Beat 1

      R.16-Beat 2

      R.16-Beat 3

      R.16-Beat 4

      R.Swing 1

      R.5BeatSwing

      R.Shuffle 1

      R.Waltz 1

      R.March 1

      R.5-Beat

      Disk/User

      6/8 Ballad

      Trad Tango

      MarchingBand

      Guitar Trio

      Music Style Disk List (AT-80SL/60SL)

      Disk 1

      01 BigBndBalld2

      02 Boogie

      03 Jazz Band

      04 Blues 2

      05 Blues 3

      06 Big Band 4

      07 Swing

      08 MidiumSwing2

      09 Slow Swing 2

      10 Bluegrass 1

      11 Bluegrass 2

      12 Cajun

      13 Slow Country

      14 ContryBallad

      15 CountrySwing

      16 Two Step 2

      17 Train Beat

      Twist 2

      19 Slow Rock 2

      20 Baroque

      21 Classic

      22 Charleston

      23 Dixieland 2

      24 Foxtrot

      25 Macarena

      26 Miami

      27 Merenge

      28 Reggae

      29 Tequila

      30 Hawaiian 2

      31 Bossa Nova 2

      32 FastBosaNova

      33 Bossa Nova 5

      34 Chacha 3

      35 Salsa 2

      36 Mambo 2

      37 Samba 2

      38 Tango 4

      39 Beguine 2

      40 Easy Listen3

      41 Easy Listen4

      42 Easy Listen5

      43 Easy Listen6

      44 Easy Listen7

      45 Pop Piano

      46 ShufflePop 1

      47 Gospel 2

      48 GospelBallad

      49 French Waltz

      50 Vienna Waltz

      51 Folk Waltz

      52 Slow Waltz 2

      53 Swing Waltz

      54 March 2/4

      55 D Marsch 6/8

      56 R&B 2

      57 Rock'n'Roll2

      58 Rock'n'Roll3

      59 Contemp 1

      60 Contemp 2

      61 Funk 1

      62 Dance Pop 2

      Disk 2

      01 Standard

      02 Five

      03 Afro & Swing

      04 Country Rock

      05 ContryWaltz2

      06 Western

      07 Western 2

      08 Ragtime 2

      09 PianoBoogie2

      10 Reggae 2

      11 Volk Musik

      12 Bossa Nova 6

      13 Rhumba 3

      14 Dance Rhumba

      15 Dance Mambo

      16 Tango 3

      17 Tango 5

      18 Tango 6

      19 Sevilla

      20 Pop 1

      21 Pop 2

      22 Pop 3

      23 Ballad 2

      24 Ballad 3

      25 Simple 8Beat

      26 Gt.Arpeggio1

      27 Gt.Arpeggio2

      28 ThreeFinger1

      29 ThreeFinger2

      30 Gt.Stroke

      31 Gt.Shuffle

      32 16BeatShfl2

      33 DeutchWalzer

      34 Jazz Waltz 2

      35 Swing Waltz2

      36 SimpleMarch2

      37 Folk Dance

      38 8Beat Enka

      39 16Beat Enka

      40 Ondo

      41 Schlager 1

      42 Schlager 2

      43 Schlager 3

      44 Contemp 3

      45 Rock 1

      46 Rock 2

      47 Rock 3

      48 Funk 2

      49 70's disco 2

      50 Dance Pop 1

      51 Dance Pop 3

      52 Dance Pop 4

      53 Dance Pop 5

      World Style Disk

      01 Tejano

      02 Country Folk

      03 Country Rock

      04 CountryBlues

      05 Rock'n'Night

      06 StridePiano

      07 Piano Ballad

      08 SFX Movie

      09 Scotland 6/8

      10 British Pop

      11 Disco People

      12 70's 8beat

      13 On The Town

      14 Fast Waltz

      15 12/8 Ballad

      16 Easy Swing

      17 German Waltz

      18 Deutsch-Pop

      19 Polonaise

      20 Ballade 6/8

      21 Disco-Beat

      22 Party-Beat

      23 DtHalfbeat

      24 Evergreen

      25 Paris Waltz

      26 Paris March

      27 ChansonTango

      28 Java

      29 French Pop 1

      30 French Pop 2

      31 French Pop 3

      32 Paso Doble

      33 Mood Kayou

      34 TasogareTown

      35 Enka 1

      36 Enka 2

      37 16Beat Pop

      38 Power 8Beat

      39 AshitaNoHero

      40 Groupe Sounds

      41 House Pop

      Chord List

      • symbol: Indicates the constituent not of chord.
        symbol: Chord shown with an "★" can be played by pressing just the key marked with the "★."

      
      C

      
      C#

      
      D

      
      E6

      
      E

      
      F

      
      Cmaj7

      
      C#maj7

      
      Dmaj7

      
      Eb maj7

      
      Emaj7

      
      Fmaj7

      
      C7

      
      C#7

      
      D7

      
      Eb7

      
      E7

      
      F7

      
      Cm

      
      C#m

      
      Dm

      
      Ebm

      
      Em

      
      Fm

      
      Cm7

      
      C#m7

      
      Dm7

      
      Eb m7

      
      Em7

      
      Fm7

      
      Cdim

      
      C#dim

      
      Ddim

      
      Ebdim

      
      Edim

      
      Fdim

      
      Cm7b5

      
      C#m7b5

      
      Dm7b5

      
      Eb m7b5

      
      Em7b5

      
      Fm7b5

      
      Caug

      
      C#aug

      
      Daug

      
      Ebaug

      
      Eaug

      
      Faug

      
      Csus4

      
      C#sus4

      
      Dsus4

      
      Eb sus4

      
      Esus4

      
      Fsus4

      
      C7sus4

      
      C#7sus4

      
      D7sus4

      
      Eb 7sus4

      
      E7sus4

      
      F7sus4

      
      C6

      
      C#6

      
      D6

      
      Eb6

      
      E6

      
      F6

      
      Cm6

      
      C#m6

      
      Dm6

      
      EB m6

      
      Em6

      
      Fm6

      

      Glossary

      Arrangement

      This refers to changes that have been made in an original tune, by adding a new accompaniment or by changing the instruments used.

      Automatic Accompaniment

      Automatic Accompaniment is automatic accompaniment when just a few keys in the lower section of the keyboard are pressed to specify the chord.

      Basic Chord

      This refers to the most commonly used types of chord, which are generally the following six types: major chords, minor chords, minor seventh chords, minor seventh (5) chords, dominant seventh chords, and diminished seventh chords.

      Chord

      Notes of two or more pitches sounded simultaneously. Chords consisting of three notes are called "triads," and are the most basic type of chord.

      Chorus

      An effect that adds spaciousness and richness to the sound.

      Ending

      This is the last part of the accompaniment. When you stop playing the Automatic Accompaniment, the AT-80SL/60SL plays an Ending appropriate for the Rhythm.

      Glide

      An effect that temporarily lowers the pitch and then gradually returns it to normal.

      Intro

      This is the introductory portion of an Automatic Accompaniment performance. The AT-80SL/60SL plays an intro ideally suited to each Rhythm when it starts playing the Automatic Accompaniment.

      Inversion

      When the lowest note of a chord is the root, the chord is said to be in "root position." In contrast, forms of a chord in which other notes are the lowest pitch are called "inversions."

      Mute

      To silence a sound. The AT-80SL/60SL provides a Track Mute function that allows you to turn off the track button indicator of a track on which music data has been recorded, so that the corresponding track will temporarily be silenced.

      Panel Settings

      Settings such as sound selections, tempo, Rotary fast/slow.

      Pitch Bend

      An effect that smoothly raises or lowers the pitch.

      Registration

      A unit of data that contains the performance state of the instrument, such as sound selections and panel settings.

      Reverb

      An effect that simulates the reverberation of a room or concert hall.

      Root Note

      The root note is the basis of a chord. All chords are built on a root note, which is the part of the chord name given in uppercase letters.

      Rotary

      An effect which simulates the modulation given to the sound when a rotating speaker is used. The Rotary effect produces two types of modulation: fast or slow.

      Split

      A function which allows the keyboard to be divided into two or more areas, and a different sound assigned to each area. The point at which the keyboard is divided is called the "Split Point."

      Sustain

      An effect that adds a decay to each note. The AT-80SL/60SL allows sustain to be applied to the voices of the upper part, lower part, and pedal part.

      Vibrato

      An effect that cyclically modulates the pitch.

      Voice

      The AT-80SL/60SL is able to produce the sounds of various instruments. These sounds are called "Voices."

      ■ About ATELIER Series Sound Generator

      The ATELIER series come equipped with GM2/GS sound generators.

      General MIDI

      General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files that meet the General MIDI standard bear the General MIDI

      GENERAL

      Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance.

      General MlDI 2

      The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 (GENERAL) recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations, such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo. In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does not include the new enhancements, is referred to as "General MIDI 1" as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2.

      GS format

      The GS Format ( GS ) is Roland's set of specifications for standardizing the performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as reverb and chorus.

      Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features when they arrive.

      SMF with Lyrics

      SMF LYRICS

      "SMF with Lyrics" refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that contains the lyrics. When music files carrying the "SMF with Lyrics" logo are played back on a compatible device (one bearing the same logo), the lyrics appears in its display.

      XGlite

      

      XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI 1 specification.

      XGite is a simplified version of XG tone generation format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may play back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.

      Replacing the Illumination Bulbs (AT-80SL Only)

      

      WARNING

      • Before replacing any light bulbs, you must turn off the power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet.
      • Wait until the bulb has cooled to room temperature before attempting to replace it.
      • Never touch a bulb while it is still hot.
      • If the bulb burns out, replace it as soon as possible.
      • In households with small children, make certain that you keep all bulbs or screws that you remove well out of the reach of children, so they don't accidentally put them into their mouths.
      • Never turn on the power of the illumination while a bulb is being replaced. If the illumination is powered-on, the bulb will become hot, and may cause burns.
      • You must replace the bulb with a bulb of the specified model number.

      Before you continue

      Note which bulb has burned out.
      Before you begin, you must note the location of the bulb that needs to be replaced, to ensure that the illumination is not powered-on while replacing the bulb.
      - Leave the power turned off for at least 20 minutes before changing the light bulb.
      When the illumination is turned on, the light bulb and the vicinity of the bulb will become hot. Turn off the power of the instrument 20 minutes before changing the light bulb, and verify that the vicinity of the bulb is no longer hot before you exchange the light bulb.
      - Obtain the replacement light bulb.

      Required items

      • Phillips screwdriver (no. 2) (when replacing the music rest illumination bulb)
      • Slotted screwdriver (when replacing the pedal area illumination bulb)
      • Replacement light bulb

      Illuminated location	Bulb type
      Panel illumination	LAMP FB33

      Panel illumination

      Remove the panel lamp cover

      1. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.
      2. Use both hands to slightly raise the cover, slide it toward the rear, and open the cover.
      3. In four locations of the panel lamp cover (A), loosen screws (B).

      NOTE

      The panel lamp cover screws cannot be removed from the panel lamp cover.

      NOTE

      Do not remove any screws other than those in the specified four locations.

      

      1. Lift the panel lamp cover (A) slightly, and remove it from the hook.

      

      Remove/install the light bulb

      1. Slightly raise the cover.
      2. Grasping the body of the light bulb, pull it slowly toward yourself to remove it.
      3. Align the pins of the new light bulb with the holes of the socket, and insert the bulb straight in.

      NOTE

      Be aware that if the pins of the light bulb are not aligned with the holes of the socket when installing the bulb, or if the bulb is inserted at an angle, the pins of the bulb could get damaged.

      

      NOTE

      Do not disconnect the connector located beside the light bulb.

      NOTE

      Be careful not to touch the metal by which the lamp board is suspended.

      NOTE

      Never turn on the power while replacing a light bulb.

      Attach the panel lamp cover

      1. Align the square hole of the panel lamp cover with the hook.

      

      1. Hook the square hole of the panel lamp cover onto the hook.
      2. Grasp the two screws located in the center of the panel lamp cover, and while lifting the panel lamp cover, lightly tighten the screws.

      

      NOTE

      Do not completely tighten the two middle screws at this time.

      1. Firmly tighten the screws at the left and right ends of the panel lamp cover.
      2. Firmly tighten the two screws at the middle of the panel lamp cover.

      NOTE

      Make sure to tighten the screws in all four locations.

      Remplacement des ampôules (AT-80SL)

      

      WARNING

      • Avant de replacer les ampoules, éteignez l'appareil et débranchez le cable d'alimentation de la prise électrique.
      • Remplacez l'ampoule une fois qu'elle est refroidie (à la température de la pierce).
      • Ne touchez pas une ampoule chaude.
      • Si l'ampoule est grillée, remplacez-la le plus tout possible.
      • S'il y a des jeunes enfants, faites attention qu'ils ne mettent pas l'ampoule ou les vis enlevées dans leur bouche.
      • Ne mettez jamais l'appareil d'éclairage sous tension pendant que vous remplacez une ampoule. Si l'appareil d'éclairage est sous tension pendant le remplacement, l'ampoule chauffera et il y aura risque de brûlure.
      • L'ampoule de remplacement doit être du modele spécifique.

      Avant de poursuivre le remplacement

      • Notez l'ampoule grillée.
        Avant d'entrepreneire le remplacement, vous devez.
        noter l'emplacement de I'ampoule à remplacer pour
        vous assurer que I'éclairage n'est pas allumé pendant
        que vous remplacez I'ampoule grillée.
      • Éteignez l'appareil et laissez-le esteint au moins 20 minutes avant de changer l'ampoule.

      Lorsque l'éclairage est allumé, l'ampoule et les surfaces à proximé de l'ampoule seront chaudes. Éteignez l'appareil 20 minutes avant de changer l'ampoule et assurez-vous que les surfaces à proximé de l'ampoule sont refroidies avant de la changer.

      • Ayez l'ampoule de remplacement sous la main

      Outils nécessaires

      • Tournevis à pointe cruciforme (no 2) (pour replacer l'ampoule du lutrin)
      • Tournevis pour écrous à fente (pour remplaçer l'ampoule d'éclairage des pédales)
      • Ampoule de remplacement

      Zone d'éclairage	Type d'ampoule
      Éclairage du panneau	AMPOULE FB33

      ■ Éclairage du panneau

      Retirer le couvercle de la lampe du tableau

      1. Debranche le cable d'alimentation de la prise.
      2. Soulevez légèrement le couvercle des deux mains, faites-le glisser vers l'arrière et ouvre-le.
      3. Dévissez les quatre vis (B) qui retiennent le couvercle (A) de la lampe du tableau.

      NOTE

      Il n'est pas possible de-retirer complètement les vis du couvercle.

      NOTE

      Ne retirez pas d'autres vis que les quatre vis montrées dans l'illustration.

      

      1. Soulevez légèrement le couvercle et retirez-le du crochet qui le retient.

      

      Retrait de l'ampoule grillée et installation de l'ampoule de remplacement

      1. Soulevez légèrement le couvercle.
      2. Saisissez l'ampoule. B!(B et tirez-la lentement vers vous pour la retirer.
      3. Alignez les broches de la nouvelle ampoule et les trous de la douille et insérez l'ampoule tout droit.

      NOTE

      Assurez you que les broches de l'ampoule soient bien alignées avec les trous de la douille; si l'ampoule est insérée en angle, il y a risqué d'endommager les broches.

      

      NOTE

      Ne déconnectez pas le connecteur situé à côté de l'ampoule.

      NOTE

      Faites attention de ne pas toucher la pièce métallique à laquelle la plaque de soutien de la lampe est suspendue.

      NOTE

      N'allumez jamais l'appareil pendant le remplacement d'une ampoule.

      Fixer le couvercle de la lampe du tableau

      1. Alignez l'ouverture angulaire du couvercle de la lampe du tableau et le crochet.

      

      1. Accrochez le couvercle de la lampe au crochet.
      2. Saisissez les deux vis situées au centre du couvercle de la lampe et tout en boulevant le couvercle, vissez-les légèrement.

      

      NOTE

      À cette étape, ne vissez pas complètement les vis.

      1. Vissez complètement les vis aux extrémités gauche et droite du couvercle.
      2. Vissez complètement les deux vis au centre du couvercle du panneau de la lampe.

      NOTE

      Les quatre vis doivent être serrées.

      Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off

      Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off

      Arranger Update

      Transpose Update

      Master Tune

      Rotary Speed

      Rotary Color

      Registration Shift

      Expression Curve

      Send PC Switch

      MIDI IN Mode

      Lyric On/Off

      Metronome Sound

      Mic Echo

      Aux Out Mode

      TV Format

      Registration Name

      Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons

      Registration Name

      Registration Shift

      Arranger Update

      Transpose Update

      Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons

      Reverb Type

      Reverb Depth

      Solo [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)

      Pedal [To Lower] button (ON/OFF)

      Key Transpose

      Left Foot Switch Assignment

      Right Foot Switch Assignment

      Damper Pedal Assignment

      Aux Out ON/OFF

      [Harmony Intelligence] button (ON/OFF)

      Harmony Intelligence Type

      Rotary [Fast/Slow] button (ON/OFF)

      Rotary [ON/OFF] button (ON/OFF)

      Bender/Glide Assignment

      Pitch Bend Range

      Pedal Bass Mode

      Solo Mode

      Solo To Lower Mode

      Solo Split Point

      [Bass Split] button (ON/OFF)

      Bass Split Point

      Sustain buttons (ON/OFF)

      Sustain Length

      Tx MIDI Channel

      After Touch ON/OFF

      Initial Touch ON/OFF

      PC Number

      Bank LSB

      Bank MSB

      Wall Type

      The Voices assigned for each part

      Level [ ][ ] (Part Balance Volume)

      The Reverb depth for each part

      The Chorus settings (ON/OFF) of the voice

      The Octave settings for each part

      The voices assigned to the [Others] buttons for each part

      [Drums/SFX] button (ON/OFF)

      [Manual Percussion] button (ON/OFF)

      Drum/SFX Set

      Manual Percussion Set

      Selected Rhythm

      [Intro/Ending] button (ON/OFF)

      [Sync Start] button (ON/OFF)

      Style Orchestrator

      Variation ON/OFF

      Chord Intelligence ON/OFF

      Leading Bass ON/OFF

      Arranger [ON/OFF] button (ON/OFF)

      Lower Voice [Hold] button (ON/OFF)

      Tempo setting

      Volume of the rhythm Accompaniment part

      Reverb depth of the rhythm Accompaniment part

      Volume of the rhythm drum part

      Reverb depth of the rhythm drum part

      Volume of the rhythm bass part

      Reverb depth of the rhythm bass part

      MIDI Implementation Chart

      Function...		Transmitted	Recognized	Remarks
      Basic Channel	Default	1 (Solo)	1 (Solo) *5
      		2 (Pedal)	2 (Pedal) *5
      		3 (Lower)	3 (Lower) *5
      		4 (Upper)	4 (Upper) *5
      		11 (Drums/SFX)	11 (Drums/SFX) *5
      		16 (Expression, PC)	16 (Expression) *5
      	Changed	1-16	1-16 (GM2/GS) *6
      			X
      Mode	Default	x	Mode 3	*10
      	Messages	x	Mode 3, 4(M=1)
      	Altered	**********
      Note Number:	True Voice	24-110	0-127
      		**********	0-127
      Velocity	Note ON	O *1	O
      	Note OFF	x 8n v=64	x
      After Touch	Key's	x	O *2, 8
      	Ch's	x	O *2, 7, 8, 9
      Pitch Bend		x	O *2, 7, 8, 9
      Control Change	0, 32	O *1	O *3, 7, 8	Bank select Modulation Portamento time Data entry Volume Panpot Expression General purpose controller (Glide) Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Resonance Release Time Attack Time Cut off Decay Time Vibrato Time Vibrato Depth Portamento control Effect1 depth Effect3 depth NRPN LSB, MSB RPN LSB, MSB
      	1	x	O *2, 7, 8
      	5	x	O *2, 7, 8
      	6, 38	x	O *2, 7, 8
      	7	x	O *2, 7, 8, 9
      	10	x	O *3, 7, 8, 9
      	11	O	O *3, 7, 8, 9
      	16	x	O *4
      	64	O	O *3, 7, 8, 9
      	65	x	O *3, 7, 8
      	66	x	O *2, 7, 8
      	67	x	O *2, 7, 8
      	71	x	O *7
      	72	x	O *7
      	73	x	O *7
      	74	x	O *7
      	75	x	O *7
      	76	x	O *7
      	77	x	O *7
      	84	x	O *2, 8
      	91	x	O *3, 7, 8
      	93	x	O *3, 7, 8
      	98, 99	x	O *3, 8
      	100, 101	x	O *2, 7, 8, 9
      Prog Change : True #		0-127 *1	O *3, 7, 8, 9	Program number 1-128
      		**********	0-127
      System Exclusive		x	O
      System Common : Song Pos		x	x
      		x	x
      		x	x
      System Real Time : Commands		O	x
      		O	x
      Aux Message : All sound off		x	O (120, 126, 127) *7, 8
      		x	O *7, 8
      		x	x
      		x	O (123-125) *7, 8, 9
      		O	O
      		x	x
      Notes		*1 O x is selectable. *6 With MIDI IN Mode 1*2 O x is selectable by SysEx. (GS Part) *7 Received in GM2 mode*3 Not received in the keyboard part *8 Received in GS mode*4 Can be received in the keyboard part *9 Received in General MIDI mode*5 With MIDI IN Mode 2 *10 Recognize as M=1 even if M≠1.

      Demo Song List

      Song Title	Composer	Player	Copyright
      Film Score	Hector Olivera	Hector Olivera	© 2004 Roland Corporation
      VivaTheater!	Tony Fenelon	Tony Fenelon	© 2004 Roland Corporation
      Accordions	Ralf Shink	Ralf Shink	© 2004 Roland Corporation
      Greensleeves	Traditional	Yuri Tachibana	© 2004 Roland Corporation
      Pop Organ	Ralf Schink	Ralf Schink	© 2004 Roland Corporation
      Pops Orch.	Hector Olivera	Hector Olivera	© 2004 Roland Corporation
      Jazz Combo	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2003 Roland Corporation
      Slow Waltz	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2003 Roland Corporation
      Hawaiian	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2003 Roland Corporation
      Dixieland	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2003 Roland Corporation
      Country	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2003 Roland Corporation
      Orchestra	Hector Olivera	Hector Olivera	© 2001 Roland Corporation
      FastBigBand	Rosemary Bailey	Rosemary Bailey	© 2001 Roland Corporation
      Pipe&Choir	Hector Olivera	Hector Olivera	© 2001 Roland Corporation
      Soprano	W.A.Mozart	Hector Olivera	© 2001 Roland Corporation
      Tenor	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 1999 Roland Corporation
      PianoStrings	Hector Olivera	Hector Olivera	© 2001 Roland Corporation
      Soft Gospel	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2001 Roland Corporation
      Organ Swing	Hal Vincent	Hal Vincent	© 2001 Roland Corporation
      Acoustic	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 2001 Roland Corporation
      Jazz Scat	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 1999 Roland Corporation
      Pipe organ	Hector Olivera	Hector Olivera	© 1999 Roland Corporation
      Orchestra2	Hector Olivera	Hector Olivera	© 1999 Roland Corporation
      Big Band	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 1999 Roland Corporation
      TheaterOrgan	Jonas Nordwall	Jonas Nordwall	© 1995 Rodgers Instruments LLC
      Choir	Hector Olivera	Hector Olivera	© 1999 Roland Corporation
      Gregorian	Ric Iannone	Ric Iannone	© 1999 Roland Corporation
      Soprano2	Rachmaninov S.	Hector Olivera	© 1999 Roland Corporation

      • Some demo songs may not be programmed in the AT-60SL.

      Profile

      Hal Vincent

      Hal consistently delights his audiences with his keyboard artistry. He is equally at home on either the organ, piano, or electronic keyboard. Around the world, his concerts generate the often heard comment "...we loved it because he plays our kind of music." This is another of Hal's special skills: a knack for knowing just what music to play on any occasion.

      An extensive repertoire combined with more than 30 years of world touring have netted Hal rave reviews while affording him the opportunity to work with some of the top names in show business. Hal has recorded several albums and published books of organ arrangements while establishing himself as an excellent clinician and teacher.

      Hector Olivera

      Hector Olivera was born in Argentina. He received his education at the Conservatory and the University of Buenos Aires followed by a scholarship at the famous Juilliard School of Music in New York. Olivera has performed extensively throughout the world including concerts at prestigious places such as the Notre Dame Cathedral in Paris and Carnegie Hall in New York. Hector Olivera's expertise involves both the traditional pipe organ and the electronic organ. Presently Olivera tours internationally playing some of the world's most magnificent pipe organs as well as his preferred electronic organ, the Roland Atelier for which he continues to collaborate with its development.

      Jonas Nordwall

      A native of Portland, Mr. Nordwall received his Bachelor of Music Degree in 1970 from the University of Portland studying with Arthur Hitchcock. Additional study was done with Frederick Geoghegan, the noted English/Canadian organist. As a teenager, Jonas had the privilege to study with Richard Ellsasser, one of the greatest virtuoso organist of 20th century.

      Besides serving as Director of Music for the First United Methodist Church in Portland, Oregon and as the Organist for the Oregon Symphony Orchestra.

      He has been a featured recitalist for national conventions of the American Theatre Organ Society and was Organist of the year for 1987.

      Ralf Schink

      Ralf Schink was born in Germany and began playing the electronic organ at the age of 9. After completing his formal education Ralf went on to study at the renowned Swiss Jazz School in Bern, Switzerland as well as the Berklee College of Music in Boston. Since then, his energetic, contemporary style has won him many accolades throughout Europe and around the world. Ralf regularly performs at the Frankfurt Musik Messe, the largest musical fair in Europe. A tremendously versatile and gifted musician, Ralf is comfortable with all types of music. From pop to jazz, Ralf's repertoire appeals to all age groups. Since 1992 Ralf has been working and touring for Roland Europe as demonstrator and product consultant. He regularly tours Europe, Asia and Canada.

      Ric Iannone

      Ric Iannone began playing the piano and accordion at the age of two and a half. By the time he was seven, he was performing public and private engagements with his musician father. For more than 20 years Ric has performed and traveled extensively throughout the United States and Europe, delighting audiences with his unique playing style and music arrangements. He is equally comfortable playing the organ, piano or keyboard, as a concert artist and product demonstrator.

      Rosemary Bailey

      Rosemary Bailey began playing the piano at the age of five, performing strictly classical music. She soon diversified and incorporated jazz and traditional popular styles in her repertoire. By the time she was nine years old, Rosemary had begun touring throughout the United states.

      Concurrently, she maintained a weekly radio show, The Rosemary Bailey Show, broadcast from Chicago.

      Rosemary has performed with many name artists including Victor Borge and Peter Nero as well as the Duke Ellington Orchestra. She was also featured soloist with the Chicago Symphony under the direction of Dr. Leon Stein.

      At home on electronic as well as pipe organs, her concert schedule has taken her to such countries as Japan, South Africa, Canada, Italy, Spain, England, Holland, Denmark, Portugal, Germany and Australia.

      Rosemary's unique arrangements involve the marriage of her classical and popular music background. Perfect pitch enables her to effortlessly field requests from the audience and adds spontaneity to all her programs.

      Rosemary has developed a following of musical devotees wherever she performs and her numerous recordings are sought after by young and old alike.

      Tony Fenelon

      Tony Fenelon studied at the Conservatory of Music in Melbourne, Australia under famed teacher Roy Shepard. An internationally acclaimed artist, Tony has completed eighteen major concert tours overseas including the United States, U.K. and Japan. He has released seventeen albums, including four gold records. Tony has also been featured regularly as a solo pianist with the Australian Philharmonic Orchestra and the Australian Pops Orchestra. In June of 2003, Tony learned that he had been awarded the distinction of "Organist for the Year 2002" by the American Theatre Organ Society, and 2004 was awarded the distinction of the Medal of the Order of Australia in Queen Elizabeth's Birthday Honours List for his contributions in music.

      Yuri Tachibana

      Although Yuri Tachibana began playing the piano at age 3, she switched completely to the organ after winning First Prize in an organ competition. She has expanded her work to include a variety of activities, releasing two albums on Columbia Records and performing organ regularly on the "11 PM" TV program for four years. She further contributes articles on a wide range of musical genres, including classical and jazz, is an accomplished arranger, and has published numerous scores. In 2002, she released "Organ Chat" on the King Records label, with all of the album's songs performed on the Music Atelier. This album has won praise for the unique arrangements and impeccable performances. Currently, Ms. Tachibana not only performs in Japan, she is also active in the U.S., Europe, China, and around the world.

      Quick Guide Function

      Short Cut		Screen/Setting
      While the Quick Guide screen is displayed,	Expression Pedal	Controller screen/Exp. Curve (Expression Curve)
      	[Bender/Vibrato] lever	Controller screen/Bender/Vibrato
      	Upper Keyboard	Upper Keyboard screen/After Touch
      	Lower Keyboard	Split Point screen
      	Pedalboard	Pedalboard screen/PedalBass Mode
      	Left Foot Switch Right Foot Switch	Controller screen/L Foot Switch (Left Foot Switch)R Foot Switch (Right Foot Switch)
      	Damper Pedal	Controller screen/Damper Pedal
      	[Solo To Lower] button	Split Point screen
      	[Bass Split] button	Split Point screen
      	Sustain [Upper] button	Upper Keyboard screen/Sustain Length
      	Sustain [Lower] button	Lower Keyboard screen/Sustain Length
      	Sustain [Pedal] button	Pedalboard screen/Sustain Length
      	Rotary [On/Off] button	Effect screen/Rotary Color
      	Rotary [Slow/Fast] button	Effect screen/Rotary Speed
      	[Count Down] button	Rhythm Options screen/Count Down Sound
      	Upper Voice select buttons Solo Voice select buttons [Alternate] button	Upper Keyboard screen
      	Lower Voice select buttons [Alternate] button	Lower Keyboard screen
      	Pedal Voice select buttons [Alternate] button	Pedalboard screen
      	Registration [Write] button	Registration Options screen/Arranger Update screen
      	[One Touch Program] button	Factory Reset screen
      	[Harmony Intelligence] button	Panel Reset screen
      	[Song] button	Song Clear screen (If the performance data has never been saved to a floppy disk, the Song Clear screen appears.)

      Main Specifications

      AT-80SL/60SL: MUSIC ATELIER

      Controller/Function	AT-80SL	AT-60SL
      Manual Keyboard	Upper keyboard 56 notes (C3 - G7), Lower keyboard 76 notes (E1 - G7)
      Pedalboard	20 notes (C2 - G3)
      Touch Response	Initial Touch with Sensitivity (10 levels for each Upper and Lower), After Touch with Sensitivity (10 levels for only Upper)
      Sound Generator	Conforms to GM2/GS/XG Lite
      Max. Polyphony	192 voices	128 voices
      Voices	420 Voices (included 31 Active Expression voices)	295 Voices (included 15 Active Expression voices)
      Upper Part	Upper Organ, Upper Symphonic, Upper Orchestral
      Lower Part	Lower Organ, Lower Symphonic, Lower Orchestral
      Solo Part	Solo
      Pedal Part	Pedal Organ, Pedal Orchestral
      	Any two voices can be assigned to each [Others] button. (One for Pedal Organ and Pedal Orchestral [Others] button.)
      Rhythms	222 Rhythms in 10 Groups	182 Rhythms in 10 Groups
      Disk Rhythm	12 Rhythms	8 Rhythms
      	Music Style Disk MSE, (MSA series; sold separately) can provide additional Music Styles.
      Rhythm Customize	Pattern editing of the internal rhythms (Drum Set, Beat, Tempo, Note)
      Number of Accompaniment/SMF play voices	226 voices
      Arranger Function	Arranger On/Off, Start/Stop, Sync Start, Intro/Ending, Intro Count Down, Break, Fill In (To Variation, To Original), Style Orchestrator (Basic, Advanced 1, Advanced 2, Full), One Touch Program, Chord Intelligence, Chord Hold, Leading Bass, Auto Standard Tempo
      Music Assistant	1,600 settings (4 variatoins for each 400 keywords)	1,200 settings (4 variatoins for each 300 keywords)
      One Touch Program	3,552 settings (16 settings for each rhythm)	2,912 settings (16 settings for each rhythm)
      Drum/SFX Sets	18 Drum Sets + 1 SFX Set	16 Drum Sets + 1 SFX Set
      Manual Percussion Sets	14 Sets	7 Sets
      Master Tuning	415.3 Hz-466.2 Hz (0.1 Hz Steps)
      Key Transpose	-4 - +7 (in semitones)
      Playback Transpose	-24 - +24 (in semitones)
      Effects	Rotary Sound, Chorus, Sustain, Vibrato, Pitch Bend, Glide
      	RSS Reverb	Reverb
      Harmony Intelligence	18 Types	12 Types
      Registration Memories	12	8
      Registration Functions	Load Next, Disk Edit
      Composer
      Tracks	7 Tracks
      Note Storage	Approx. 40,000 notes
      Song Length	Max. 999 measures
      Tempo	Quarter note = 20–500
      Resolution	120 ticks per quarter note
      Recording	Realtime (Replace, Punch In/Out, Loop)
      Edit Function	Delete Measure, Delete Track, Erase, Copy, Quantize
      Metronome
      Beat	2/2, 0/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8
      Volume	10 levels
      Sound	4 types
      Disk Storage: 3.5 inch micro floppy disk
      Disk Format	720 K bytes (2DD), 1.44 M bytes(2HD)
      Songs	Max. 99 songs
      Rated Power Output	10 W + 10 W + 60 W + 60 W + 100 W (low-range)	40 W + 40 W
      Speaker
      Full-range (small)	8 cm x 2	8 cm x 2
      Full-range (large)	16 cm x 4	25 cm x 2
      Woofer	30 cm x 1	—
      Display	Graphic 320 x 240 dots backlit Color LCD with touch screen
      Score	Great Staff, G Clef Staff, F Clef Staff with note name, with Lyric (Built-in Display)
      Lyric	Yes (Built-in Display, Video Out)	Yes (Built-in Display)
      Pedal	Expression Pedal (ready for the Active Expression feature), Damper Pedal
      Foot Switches	2 pcs. (on the expression pedal, function assignable)
      Connectors	Phones Jack (stereo), Audio Output Jacks (L/mono, R), Audio Input Jacks (L/mono, R), Mic Input Jack, MIDI Connectors (In, Out), Computer Connector, AC Inlet
      	Aux Out jack, Video Out jack	—
      Power Supply	AC 117 V, AC 230 V, AC 240 V
      Power Consumption	340 W (AC 117V)	130 W (AC 117V)
      	340 W (AC 230V)	130 W (AC 230V)
      	340 W (AC 240V)	130 W (AC 240V)
      Finish	Dark Walnut	Satin Mahogany
      Dimensions
      Console	1,350 (W) x 649 (D) x 581 (H) mm53-3/16 (W) x 25-9/16 (D) x 22-7/8 (H) inches	1,338 (W) x 649 (D) x 568 (H) mm52-11/16 (W) x 25-9/16 (D) x 22-3/8 (H) inches
      Stand	1,328 (W) x 596 (D) x 755 (H) mm52-5/16 (W) x 23-1/2 (D) x 29-3/4 (H) inches	1,324 (W) x 596 (D) x 755 (H) mm52-1/8 (W) x 23-1/2 (D) x 29-3/4 (H) inches
      Total	1,350 (W) x 649 (D) x 1,328 (H) mm53-3/16 (W) x 25-9/16 (D) x 52-5/16 (H) inches	1,338 (W) x 649 (D) x 1,316 (H) mm52-11/16 (W) x 25-9/16 (D) x 51-13/16 (H) inches
      Weight
      Console	67.0 kg147 lbs 12 oz	63.5 kg140 lbs
      Stand	61.5 kg135 lbs 10 oz	45.5 kg100 lbs 5 oz
      Total	128.5 kg283 lbs 5 oz	109.0 kg240 lbs 5 oz
      Accessories	Owner's Manual, 3.5 inch micro floppy disk (2HD blank disk), Music Style Disk x 3, Power Cord

      • In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.

      Index

      A

      Active Expression Voice 49
      Aftertouch 184
      Aftertouch Sensitivity 184
      Arranger function 68
      Arranger Update 190
      Automatic Accompaniment 68
      Aux Out 210
      Aux Out Mode 210

      B

      Bass Split 140
      Beat 193
      Bender/Vibrato 187
      BMP Installer 198
      Bouncing Ball 26
      Break 69,118
      Brilliance 115

      C

      Calibration 197
      Chord Hold 188
      Chord Intelligence 70
      Chorus Effect 127
      Connecting Audio Equipment 205
      Computer 206
      MIDI Devices 208
      Copy 170
      Copying Rhythms on Disks into User Memory 78

      Rhythms Saved in User Memory to Floppy Disks 81

      Count Down 68
      Count Down Sound 189
      Count In Play 153
      Count-In Recording 164

      D

      Damper Pedal 115, 186
      Delete Measure 165
      Delete Track 166
      Deleting Performance Songs 160
      Registrations on a Floppy Disk 108
      Rhythms Stored in User Memory 87
      Demo Song 30
      Demo Song List 257
      Disk Edit 110
      Disk Rhythm 76
      Drums/SFX 56

      Drums/SFX Set List 225
      Drums/SFX Sets 57

      E

      Editing 165
      Effects 122
      Erase Event 168
      Erasing Performance Song 156
      Exp.Curve 121
      Exp. Src (Play) 187
      Exp. Src (Rec) 186
      Expression Pedal 120

      F

      Factory Reset 23
      Factory Setting Disk button 80
      Fill In 69, 118
      Foot Switch 117-118
      Footage 50
      Formatting Disks 96

      G

      Glide 118

      H

      Harmony Intelligence 122
      Headphones 21
      Human Voice 47

      1

      Illumination 22
      Replacing the Illumination Bulbs 251
      Initial Touch Sensitivity 185

      K

      Key Transpose 114

      L

      LCD Contrast 203-204
      Leading Bass 72, 118
      Load Next 106
      Loading Individual Registration 103

      Performance Songs 159
      Set of Registrations 101

      Loop Recording 163
      Lower Hold 60
      Lower Voice 42

      Lyrics 191

      M

      Main Screen 26

      Background 200

      Bouncing Ball 201

      Manual Percussion 58

      Manual Percussion List 233

      Manual Percussion Sets 59

      MasterTune 194

      Metronome 192

      Metronome Sound 193

      Metronome Volume 192

      Mic Echo 194

      Microphone 22

      MIDI 208

      MIDI IN Mode 196

      Music Assistant 32

      Music Assistant search 34

      Music Style Disk List 246

      N

      Notation 149

      0

      Octave Shift 54

      One Touch Program 74

      P

      Panel Reset 25

      Part Balance 52

      PC Number 195

      Pedal Bass Voice 43

      Pedal To Lower 142

      PedalBass Mode 185

      Pitch Bend Range 188

      Pitch Bend/Vibrato 116

      Play Transpose 191

      Playing

      Demo Song 30

      Performance Song 153

      Performance Songs Stored on Floppy Disk 145

      Rhythm 65

      Punch-in Recording 162

      Q

      Quick Guide 38

      Index menu 38

      Quick Registration 36

      R

      Recording 143

      Each Part Separately 154

      Performance 152

      Re-Recording 155

      Regist Shift 119

      Registration

      Arranger Update 92

      Recalling a Registration 91

      Storing Registrations 90

      Registrations

      Created on an Earlier Model 111

      Rename

      Performance Song 156

      Registration 94

      Rhythms Stored in User Memory 85

      Reverb Effect

      Depth of the Reverb 133-134

      Reverb Type 131

      Wall Type 132

      Rhythm 61

      Rhythm Customize 173

      Rhythm List 242

      Rotary Effect 118, 124

      Rotary Color 126

      Rotary Speed 125

      RSSReverb 210

      s

      Saving

      Performance Songs 158

      Registration Sets 98

      Send PC Switch 195

      SMF Format 159

      SMF Music Files 145

      Solo Mode 138

      Solo To Lower 137

      Solo To Lower Mode 138

      Solo Voice 44

      Split Point

      Bass Split Point 141

      Solo Split Point 139

      Style Orchest

      Sub-window

      Sustain Effect 128

      Sustain Length 129

      Sync Start 66

      T

      Tempo 67

      Touch Screen 26

      Tr. Mute (Track Mute) 148

      Track Button 144

      TrackMute 147

      Track Mute button 148

      Trans. Update (Transpose Update) 190

      Transpose

      Key Transpose 114

      Play Transpose 191

      TV Format 209

      Tx MIDI Ch. (MIDI Transmit Channel 196

      U

      Upper Voice 42

      UserMemory 25,62

      UserRhythm 173

      V

      Video Out 209

      Voice 40

      Voice List 220

      Volume

      Master Volume 21

      Part Balance 52

      Information

      When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as

      shown below.

      

      EGYPT

      Al Fanny Trading Office

      9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street

      ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,

      Cairo 11341, EGYPT

      TEL: [phone]

      REUNION

      Maison FO - YAM Marcel

      25 Rue Jules Hermann,

      Chaudron-BP79 97491

      Ste Clotilde Cedex,

      REUNION ISLAND

      TEL: [phone]

      SOUTH AFRICA

      That Other Music Shop

      (PTY) Ltd.

      11 Melle St., Braamfontein, Johannesburg, SOUTH AFRICA

      P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017

      Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA

      TEL: [phone]

      Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.

      17 Werdmuller Centre,

      Main Road, Claremont 7708

      SOUTH AFRICA

      P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735

      SOUTH AFRICA

      TEL: [phone]

      

      CHINA

      Roland Shanghai Electronics

      Co., Ltd.

      5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road

      Shanghai 200090, CHINA

      TEL: [phone]

      Roland Shanghai Electronics

      Co,Ltd.

      (BEIJING OFFICE)

      10F.No.18 Anhuaxil

      Chaoyang District, Beijing 100011

      CHINA

      TEL: [phone]

      Roland Shanghai Electronics

      Co.,Ltd.

      (GUANGZHOU OFFICE)

      2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie Yi

      Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,

      Guangzhou 510600, CHINA

      Tel: [phone]

      HONG KONG

      Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

      Service Division

      22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen

      Wan, New Territories,

      HONG KONG

      TEL: [phone]

      Parsons Music Ltd.

      8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39

      Chatham Road South, T.S.T.

      Kowloon, HONG KONG

      TEL:233

      INDIA

      Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.

      409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi

      Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edw

      Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,

      INDIA

      TEL: [phone]

      INDONESIA

      PT Citra IntiRama

      J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150

      Jakarta Pusat

      INDONESIA

      TEL: [phone]

      KOREA

      Cosmos Corporation

      1461-9, Seocho-Dong

      Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA

      TEL: [phone]

      MALAYSIA

      BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD

      140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang

      55100 Kuala Lumpur, MALAYSIA

      TEL: [phone]

      PHILIPPINES

      G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.

      339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue

      Makati, Metro Manila 1200,

      PHILIPPINES

      TEL: [phone]

      SINGAPO

      Swee Lee Company

      150 Sims Drive,

      SINGAPORE 387381

      TEL: [phone]

      CRISTOFORIMUSIC PTE

      LTD

      Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,

      02-2148,SINGAPORE 489980

      TEL: [phone]

      TAIWAN

      ROLAND TAIWAN

      ENTERPRISE CO.,LTD.

      Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan

      N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN

      R.O.C.

      TEL: [phone]

      THAILAND

      Theera Music Co., Ltd.

      330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,

      Bangkok 10100, THAILAND

      TEL: [phone]

      VIETNAM

      Saigon Music

      Suite DP-8

      40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan Street

      Hochiminh City, VIETNAM

      Tel: [phone]

      

      NEW ZEALAND

      AUSTRALIA

      Roland Corporation

      Australia Pty., Ltd

      38 Campbell Avenue

      Dee Why West. NSW 2099

      AUSTRALIA

      TEL: [phone]

      NEW ZEALAND

      Roland Corporation Ltd.

      32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,

      Auckland, NEW ZEALAND

      TEL: [phone]

      

      AMERICA

      ARGENTINA

      Instrumentos Musicales S.A.

      Ay.Santa Fe 2055

      (1123) Buenos Aires

      ARGENTINA

      TEL: [phone]

      BRAZIL

      Roland Brasil Ltda

      Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B

      Parque Industrial San Jose

      Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL

      TEL: [phone]

      COSTA RICA

      JUAN Bansbach

      Instrumentos Musicales

      Ave.1.Calle 11,Apartado 10237

      San Jose, COSTA RICA

      TEL: [phone]

      CHILE

      Comercial Fancy II S.A.

      Rut.: 96.919.420-1

      Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor

      Santiago - Centro, CHILE

      TEL: [phone]

      EL SALVADOR

      OMNI MUSIC

      75 Avenida Norte y Final

      Alameda Juan Pablo II

      Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,

      EL SALVADOR

      TEL: [phone]

      MEXICO

      Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.

      Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar

      de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.

      MEXICO

      TEL: [phone]

      PANAMA

      SUPROMUNDIAL, S.A.

      Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,

      Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA

      TEL: [phone]

      PARAGUAY

      Distribuidora De

      Instrumentos Musicales

      J.E. Oleary ESQ. Manduvira

      Asuncion PARAGUAY

      TEL: [phone]

      URUGUAY

      Todo Musica S.A.

      Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771

      C.P.: 11.800

      Montevideo, URUGUAY

      TEL: [phone]

      VENEZUELA

      Musicland Digital C.A.

      Av. Francisco de Miranda,

      Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel

      C2 Local 20 Caracas

      VENEZUELA

      TEL: [phone]

      

      AUSTRIA

      Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.

      Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,

      A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA

      TEL: [phone]

      BELGIUM/HOLLAND/

      LUXEMBOURG

      Roland Benelux N. V.

      Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel

      (Westerlo) BELGIUM

      TEL: [phone]

      CZECH REP.

      K-AUDIO

      Kardasovska 626.

      CZ-198 00 Praha 9,

      CZECH REP

      TEL: [phone]

      DENMARK

      Roland Scandinavia A/S

      Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,

      DK-2100 Copenhagen

      DENMARK

      TEL: [phone]

      FRANCE

      Roland France SA

      4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,

      Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.

      Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE

      TEL: [phone]

      FINLAND

      Roland Scandinavia As,

      Filial Finland

      Elannontie 5

      FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND

      TEL: [phone]

      GERMANY

      Roland Elektronische

      Musikinstrumente HmbH.

      Oststrasse 96, 2284 Norderstedt,

      GERMANY

      TEL: [phone]

      GREECE

      STOLLAS S.A.

      Music Sound Light

      155, New National Road

      Patras 26442, GREECE

      TEL: [phone]

      HUNGARY

      Roland East Europe Ltd.

      Warehouse Area DEPO' Pf.83

      H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY

      TEL: [phone]

      IRELAND

      Roland Ireland

      G2 Calmount Park, Calmunt

      Avenue, Dublin 12

      Republic of IRELAND

      TEL: [phone]

      ITALY

      Roland Italy S. p. A.

      Viale delle Industrie 8,

      20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY

      TEL: [phone]

      NORWAY

      Roland Scandinavia Avd.

      Kontor Norge

      Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95

      Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo

      NORWAY

      TEL:[phone]

      MY MUSIC

      POLAND

      UL. Gibraltarska 4.

      PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND

      TEL: [phone]

      PORTUGAL

      Tecnologias Musica e Audio,

      Roland Portugal, S.A.

      Cais Das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto

      4050-465 PORTO

      PORTUGAL

      TEL: [phone]

      ROMANIA

      FBS LINES

      Piata Libertatii 1,

      535500 Gheorgheni, ROMANIA

      TEL: [phone]

      RUSSIA

      MuTek

      3-Bogatvrskaya Str. 1.k.l

      107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA

      TEL: [phone]

      SPAIN

      Roland Electronics

      de Espana, S. A.

      Calle Bolivia 239,08020

      Barcelona, SPAIN

      TEL: [phone]

      SWEDEN

      Roland Scandinavia A/S

      SWEDISH SALES OFFICE

      Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.

      S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN

      TEL: [phone]

      SWITZERLAND

      Roland (Switzerland) AG

      Landstrasse 5, Postfach,

      CH-4452 Itingen,

      SWITZERLAND

      TEL: [phone]

      UKRAINE

      TIC-TAC

      Mira Str. 19/108

      P.O.Box 180

      295400 Munkachevo, UKR

      TEL: [phone]

      UNITED KINGDOM

      Roland (U.K.) Ltd.

      Atlantic Close, Swansea

      Enterprise Park, SWANSEA

      SA7 9FJ,

      UNITED KINGDOM

      TEL: [phone]

      

      BAHRAIN

      Moon S

      No.16. Bab Al Bahrain Avenue.

      P.O.Box 247, Manama 304.

      State of BAHRAIN

      TEL: 211 005

      CYPRUS

      Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.

      1. Diagorou Street, Nicosia.

      CYPRUS

      TEL: [phone]

      IRAN

      MOCO, INC.

      No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,

      Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad

      Tehran, IRAN

      TEL: [phone]

      ISRAEL

      Halilit P. Greenspoon &

      Sons Ltd.

      8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.

      Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL

      TEL: [phone]

      JORDAN

      AMMAN Trading Agency

      245 Prince Mohammad St.,

      Amman 1118, JORDAN

      TEL: [phone]

      KUWAIT

      Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est.

      Abdullah Salem Street,

      Safat, KUWAIT

      TEL: [phone]

      LEBANON

      Chahine S.A.L

      Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,

      Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857

      Beirut,LEBANON

      TEL: [phone]

      QATAR

      Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio

      & Stores)

      P.O.Box 62Doha, QATAR

      TEL: [phone]

      SAUDI ARABIA

      aDawliah Universal

      Electronics APL

      Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,

      1st Floor, Alkhobar,

      SAUDI ARABIA

      P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952

      SAUDI ARABIA

      TEL: [phone]

      SYRIA

      Technical Light & Sound

      Center

      Khaled Ebn Al Walid St

      Bldg. No. 47, P.O.BOX 13520,

      Damascus, SYRIA

      TEL: [phone]

      TURKEY

      Ant Muzik Aletleri Ithalat

      Ve Ihracat Ltd Sti

      Sirasylviler Caddesi Sirasylviler

      Pasaji No:74/20

      Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY

      TEL: [phone]

      U.A.E

      Zak Electronics & Musical

      Instruments Co. L.L.C.

      Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.

      No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.

      TEL: [phone]

      

      CANADA

      Roland Canada Music Ltd.

      (Head Office)

      5480 Parkwood Way Richmond

      B.C.V6V2M4CANADA

      TEL: [phone]

      Roland Canada Music Ltd.

      (Toronto Office)

      170 Admiral Boulevard

      Mississauga On L5T 2N6

      CANADA

      TEL: [phone]

      U.S.A.

      Roland Corporation U.S.

      5100 S. Eastern Avenue

      Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938

      U.S.A.

      TEL: [phone]

      As of November 1, 2003 (Roland)

      

      For EU Countries

      This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.

      -For the USA

      FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

      This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

      Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
      - Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
      - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
      - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

      This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

      (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
      (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

      Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.

      This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.

      For Canada

      NOTICE

      This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Caising Equipment Regulations.

      AVIS

      Cet appeareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.